MG34M422

Contents Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
Contents
1 Introduction 1-1
1.1 Introduction 1-1
1.1.1 Sequence of Operation 1-2
2 Safety Instructions and General Warnings 2-1

2.1 Safety and Warnings 2-1
2.1.1 High Voltage Warning 2-1
2.1.2 Caution 2-1
2.1.3 Disposal 2-1
2.1.4 Software Version 2-1
2.1.5 Safety Instructions 2-1
2.1.6 General Warning 2-2
2.1.7 Leakage Current 2-2
2.1.8 Residual Current Device 2-2
2.1.9 IT Mains 2-2
2.1.10 Avoid Unintended Start 2-2
2.2 Safe Torque Off 2-2
2.2.1 Terminal 37 Safe Torque Off Function 2-3
2.2.2 Safe Torque Off Commissioning Test 2-8
3 How to Install 3-1

3.1 Environment 3-1
3.1.1 Ambient Temperature and Altitude 3-1
3.1.2 Environmental Requirements for Mechanical Installation 3-1
3.2 Mechanical Installation 3-1
3.2.1 Accessory Bags 3-1
3.2.2 Mechanical Mounting 3-2
3.2.3 Mechanical Dimensions 3-3
3.3 Electrical Installation 3-4
3.3.1 Cables General 3-4
3.3.2 Removal of Knockouts for Extra Cables 3-4
3.3.3 Mains Connection for B1, B2 and B3 3-5
3.3.4 Mains connection for B4, C1 and C3 3-5
3.3.5 Motor Compressor Connection 3-6
3.3.6 Motor Compressors Cables 3-7
3.3.7 Electrical Installation of Motor Compressor Cables 3-7
3.3.8 Compressor Motor Protection 3-7
3.3.9 Access to Control Terminals 3-8
MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

3.3.10 Basic Wiring Example 3-9

3.3.11 Electrical Installation, Control Cables 3-10
3.3.12 Electrical Installation - EMC Protection 3-12
3.3.13 Safety Ground Connection 3-14
3.3.14 Basic Examples of Control Connections 3-14
3.3.15 High-voltage Test 3-15
3.4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 3-15
3.4.1 Fuses 3-15
3.4.2 Recommendations 3-15
3.4.3 CE Compliance 3-16
3.4.4 Fuse Specifications 3-16
3.5 Application Example 3-20
3.5.1 BASIC Cascade/Pack Controller 3-20
3.5.2 System Status and Operation 3-21
3.5.3 Pack Compressor Wiring Diagram 3-21
4 Quick Set-up 4-1

4.1 Quick Set-up 4-1
4.1.1 Basic Programming Procedures 4-1
4.1.2 Open Loop with External Reference 4-1
4.1.3 PID Closed Loop with 4-20 mA Pressure Transmitter 4-1
4.1.4 Other Compressor Features 4-3
5 How to Program 5-1

5.1 How to Program on the Graphical LCP 5-1
5.1.1 Control Panel 5-1
5.1.2 Display Lines 5-1
5.1.3 Display Contrast Adjustment 5-1
5.1.4 Indicator Lights 5-2
5.2 LCP Keys 5-2
5.2.1 Function Keys 5-2
5.2.2 Navigation Keys 5-2
5.2.3 Local Control Keys 5-2
5.2.4 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings 5-3
5.2.5 Data Storage in LCP 5-3
5.2.6 Initialization to Default Settings 5-3
5.2.7 Data Transfer from LCP to Frequency Converter 5-4
5.2.8 Parameter Selection 5-4
5.2.9 Changing Data 5-5

5.2.10 Changing a Text Value 5-5

5.2.11 Changing a Group of Numeric Data Values 5-5
6 Parameter Descriptions 6-1

6.1 LCP Display 6-1
6.1.1 LCP Programming 6-1
6.2 Par. Group 0 - Operation and Display 6-2
6.3 Par. Group 1 - Load and Motor 6-8
6.4 Par. Group 3 - Reference/Ramps 6-9
6.5 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 6-13
6.6 Par. Group 5 - Digital In/Out 6-16
6.7 Par. Group 6 - Analog In/Out 6-26
6.8 Par. Group 7 - Controllers 6-30
6.9 Parameters: 8-** Communications and Options 6-35
6.10 Par. Group 13 - Smart Logic Control 6-39
6.11 Par. Group 14 - Special Functions 6-55
6.12 Par. Group 15 - Drive Information 6-58
6.13 Parameters: 16-** Data Readouts 6-59
6.14 Par. Group 25 - Cascade Controller 6-65
6.15 Par. Group 28 - Compressor Functions 6-76
6.16 Parameter Lists 6-81
6.16.1 Conversion 6-81
7 Troubleshooting 7-1
7.1 Status Messages 7-1
7.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages 7-1
8 General Specifications 8-1

8.1.1 Mains Supply 3x200-240 V AC 8-1
9 Index 9-1


Introduction Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
1 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Introduction
Unit controller
VFD
130BC396.13
Start/stop
Reference High pressure cutout

Drive
Low Pressure Cutout
Pressure sensor 4-20 mA
Oil solenoid
Figure 1.1 Compressor Drive System
The VLT® Compressor Drives utilize and combine Danfoss The frequency converter is 100% preset for speed open
design and manufacturing expertise. Our extensive loop configuration with 0-10 V reference corresponding to
application knowledge of refrigeration, air conditioning, 1800-5400 RPM for CDS 302 and 1500-6000 RPM for CDS
and motion controls ensures an optimized product design 303.
and package solution:
• A “plug & play” solution
• Operational efficiency
• Flexibility & best control accuracy
• Innovative and reliable solution
MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor 1-1

Introduction Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
1 1
The dedicated frequency converter functionality includes: • High Pressure Switch
The high-pressure switch must be connected to
• Start Up
input terminal 37 of the frequency converter in
Once the frequency converter has a start
command, the compressor runs up to 3000 RPM series with the other safety devices.
and remains at that speed for 10 s. Once this
initial time is complete, the frequency converter 1.1.1 Sequence of Operation
slowly ramps to the reference speed.
All compressor types have strong demands of speed limits
• Shut Down
to ensure the oil lubrication of the bearings. Therefore, fast
The stop command bypasses the normal ramp
acceleration from standstill to minimum speed with a
time and the frequency converter ramps the
special start ramp is important, when a start command is
compressor to stop fast.
given. This is also the reason why the Compressor Drive
• Short Cycle Prevention trips with an alarm [A49] Speed Limit, if the speed falls
The frequency converter has a minimum running below minimum speed e.g. when the current limit
time of 12 s, with an interval between starts of 5 controller reduces the speed due to a high load. This alarm
minutes (300 s). The short cycle delay values are is reset automatically after 30 s and the compressor
adjustable in parameter group 28-0* Short Cycle restarts.
Protection.
• Oil Injection If a rotor is blocked, the Compressor Drive trips with an

The frequency converter cycles a solenoid valve alarm [A18] Start failed, if the speed fails to get above the
via its relay 1. This cycling ensures that the oil is minimum speed limit for the compressor within 2 s. This
distributed to the scroll set, improves tightness, alarm is reset automatically after 30 s and the compressor
and reduces internal gas leakage during the restarts.
compression process.
• Oil Management The manufacturer sets up the necessary start settings,

If compressor speed is below 3000 RPM for a motor data and all the other preferred settings for each
determined amount of time (within 60 minutes), compressor type/size. Automatically set up the values by
the boost cycle runs the compressor back to 4200 selecting the actual compressor in 1-13 Compressor
RPM for a determined amount of time (within 90 Selection.
s). The maximum time between fixed boosts is
limited to a determined amount of time (within
24 hours).
• Discharge Temperature Limit

If the discharge temperature exceeds the warning
level of 266 °F, the compressor drops in speed by
10 Hz for the next 3 minutes. The compressor
continues to drop 10 Hz for each 3 minutes for as
long as the temperature is over the warning level.
If the discharge temperature exceeds the
emergency level of 293 °C, the compressor is
stops.
• Crankcase Heater
On VSH088 and VSH117, when the compressor is
stopped, the frequency converter provides a DC
current to the compressor motor. The DC current
keeps the oil warm and an external crankcase
heater is not needed.
VSH170 needs an external crankcase heater
(surface sump heater or belt type).
• Low Pressure Switch

An LP switch is mandatory with the frequency
converter compressor in any type of application.
1-2 MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

Safety Instructions and Gen... Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
2 Safety Instructions and General Warnings

2 2
Drive
Do not dispose of equipment containing electrical
2.1 Safety and Warnings components together with domestic waste. It must be
collected separately with Electrical and Electronic Waste
2.1.1 High Voltage Warning
according to local and national legislation.
WARNING Compressors
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous Do not to throw away a used compressor, but dispose of it
whenever the converter is connected to mains. Incorrect and its oil at a specialized recycling company site.
fitting of the motor or frequency converter may damage
the equipment, or cause serious injury, or death. It is
NOTICE!
essential to comply with the instructions in this manual as Imposed limitations on the output frequency
well as local and national rules and safety regulations. (due to export control regulations):
From software versions 2.4x (CDS 302) and 1.0x (CDS 303),
WARNING the output frequency of the frequency converter is limited

to 590 Hz.
Installation in high altitudes:
By altitudes above 2 km (6561 ft), contact Danfoss
2.1.4 Software Version
regarding PELV.
CDS 302 Operating Instructions Software version: 2.4x

2.1.2 Caution
CAUTION
The VLT® Compressor Drives DC link capacitors remain
These Operating Instructions can be used for all CDS 302
charged after power has been disconnected. To avoid an
Compressor Drives® with software version 2.4x. The software
electrical shock hazard, disconnect the frequency converter
version number can be read in 15-43 Software Version.
from the mains before carrying out maintenance. Wait at
least as follows before doing service on the frequency
converter: CDS 303 Operating Instructions Software version: 1.0x
CDS 302 and CDS 303: 11-22 kW 15 minutes
High voltage can be present on the DC link even when the
LEDs are turned off.
2.1.3 Disposal These Operating Instructions can be used for all CDS 303
Compressor Drives® with software version 1.0x. The software
version number can be read in 15-43 Software Version.
2.1.5 Safety Instructions
• Make sure that the frequency converter is

Figure 2.1 properly connected to ground
• Do not remove mains plugs or motor plugs while

the frequency converter is connected to mains
• Protect personnel against supply voltage
• Protect the motor against overloading according

to local and national regulations
• Motor overload protection is included in the

default settings

• The ground leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA 2.1.10 Avoid Unintended Start
2 2 • The [Off] key is not a safety switch. It does not
disconnect the frequency converter from mains While the frequency converter is connected to mains, the
motor can be started/stopped using:
2.1.6 General Warning
• digital commands
WARNING • bus commands
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the • references
equipment has been disconnected from mains. Also make • via the Local Control Panel (LCP)
sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected,
Disconnect the frequency converter from mains whenever
such as load-sharing (linkage of DC intermediate circuit).
personal safety considerations make it necessary to avoid
Using VLT® Compressor Drives: Wait at least 15 minutes.
unintended start. To avoid unintended start, always press
Shorter time is allowed only if indicated on the nameplate
[OFF] before changing parameters. An electronic fault,
for the specific unit.
temporary overload, a fault in the mains supply, or lost
motor connection may cause a stopped motor to start. A
2.1.7 Leakage Current frequency converter with Safe Torque Off provides a
certain degree of protection against such unintended start,
CAUTION if the Safe Torque Off Terminal 37 is on low voltage level
or disconnected.
The ground leakage current from the frequency converter
exceeds 3.5 mA. Ensure good mechanical ground
connection (terminal 95) to the ground cable. Use at least 2.2 Safe Torque Off
10 mm2 cable cross section or 2 times rated ground wires
terminated separately. The frequency converter can perform the safety function
Safe Torque Off (STO, as defined by EN IEC 61800-5-21) and
Stop Category 0 (as defined in EN 60204-12).
2.1.8 Residual Current Device Before integration and use of Safe Torque Off in an instal-
lation, perform a thorough risk analysis to determine
CAUTION whether the Safe Torque Off functionality and safety levels
This product can cause a DC current in the protective are appropriate and sufficient. Safe Torque Off is designed
conductor. Where a ground fault interrupter (GFI) is used and approved suitable for the requirements of:
for extra protection, only use an GFI of Type B (time • Safety Category 3 in EN 954-1 (and EN ISO
delayed) on the supply side of this product. See also RCD 13849-1)
Application Note, MN90G. Protective grounding of the
frequency converter and the use of RCDs must always
• Performance Level "d" in EN ISO 13849-1:2008
follow local and national regulations. • SIL 2 Capability in IEC 61508 and EN 61800-5-2
• SILCL 2 in EN 62061
2.1.9 IT Mains 1) Refer to EN IEC 61800-5-2 for details of Safe torque off
(STO) function.
CAUTION 2) Refer to EN IEC 60204-1 for details of stop category 0
Do not connect 400 V frequency converters with RFI-filters and 1.

to mains supplies with a voltage between phase and Activation and Termination of Safe Torque Off
ground of more than 440 V. For IT mains and delta ground The Safe Torque Off (STO) function is activated by
(grounded leg), mains voltage may exceed 440 V between removing the voltage at terminal 37 of the safe inverter. By
phase and ground. To disconnect the internal RFI connecting the safe inverter to external safety devices
capacitors from the RFI filter to ground, use 14-50 RFI 1 on providing a safe delay, an installation for a Safe Torque Off
the frequency converter. This procedure reduces the RFI Category 1 can be obtained. The Safe Torque Off function
performance to A2 level. can be used for asynchronous, synchronous, and
permanent magnet motors.

WARNING Abbrev. Ref.

Cat. EN 954-1
Description
Category, level “B, 1-4” 2 2
After installation of Safe Torque Off (STO), a commissioning
FIT Failure In Time: 1E-9 hours
test as specified in section Safe Torque Off Commissioning
HFT IEC 61508 Hardware Fault Tolerance: HFT = n
Test in the Design Guide must be performed. A passed
means, that n+1 faults could cause a
commissioning test is mandatory after first installation and
loss of the safety function
after each change to the safety installation.
MTTFd EN ISO Mean Time To Failure - dangerous. Unit:
13849-1 years
Safe Torque Off Technical Data
PFH IEC 61508 Probability of Dangerous Failures per
The following values are associated to the different types
Hour. Consider the PFH value when the
of safety levels:
safety device is operated in high
Reaction time for T37 demand (more often than once per
• Maximum reaction time: 10 ms year); or operated in continuous mode,
Reaction time = delay between de-energizing the STO where the frequency of demands for
input and switching off the frequency converter output operation made on a safety-related
bridge. system is greater than one per year.
PL EN ISO Discrete level used to specify the ability
Data for EN ISO 13849-1
13849-1 of safety-related parts of control systems
• Performance Level "d" to perform a safety function under
• MTTFd (Mean Time To Dangerous Failure): 24816 foreseeable conditions. Levels a-e.
years SFF IEC 61508 Safe Failure Fraction [%]; Percentage
• DC (Diagnostic Coverage): 99% part of safe failures and dangerous

detected failures of a safety function or
• Category 3 a subsystem related to all failures.
• Lifetime 20 years SIL IEC 61508 Safety Integrity Level
Data for EN IEC 62061, EN IEC 61508, EN IEC 61800-5-2 STO EN Safe Torque Off
61800-5-2
• SIL 2 Capability, SILCL 2
SS1 EN 61800 Safe Torque Off 1
• PFH (Probability of Dangerous failure per -5-2
Hour)=7e-10FIT=7e-19/h
• SFF (Safe Failure Fraction) >99% Table 2.1 Abbreviations Related to Functional Safety
• HFT (Hardware Fault Tolerance)=0 (1001

The PFDavg value (Probability of Failure on Demand)
architecture)
Failure probability in the event of a request of the safety
• Lifetime 20 years function.
Data for EN IEC 61508 low demand

2.2.1 Terminal 37 Safe Torque Off Function
• PFDavg for one-year proof test: 3, 07E-14
• PFDavg for three year proof tests: 9, 20E-14 The frequency converter is available with Safe Torque Off
• PFDavg for five year proof tests: 1, 53E-13 functionality via control terminal 37. Safe Torque Off
disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors
No maintenance of the STO functionality is needed.
of the frequency converter output stage. This in turn
prevents generating the voltage required to rotate the
Take the necessary security measures, e.g. installation in a motor. When the Safe Torque Off (T37) is activated, the
closed cabinet that is only accessible for skilled personnel. frequency converter issues an alarm, trips the unit, and
coasts the motor to a stop. Manual restart is required. The
SISTEMA Data Safe Torque Off function can be used as an emergency
Functional safety data is available via a data library for use stop for the frequency converter. In normal operating
with the SISTEMA calculation tool from the IFA (Institute mode when Safe Torque Off is not required, use the
for Occupational Safety and Health of the German Social regular stop function instead. When automatic restart is
Accident Insurance), and data for manual calculation. The used, ensure the requirements of ISO 12100-2 paragraph
library is permanently completed and extended. 5.3.2.5 are fulfilled.

Liability Conditions • When external forces influence the motor axis (for
2 2 Ensure that qualified personnel installs and operates the
Safe Torque Off function:
example, suspended loads), more measures are
required (for example, a safety holding brake) to
eliminate potential hazards
• Read and understand the safety regulations Safe Torque Off Installation and Set-Up
concerning health and safety/accident prevention
WARNING
• Understand the generic and safety guidelines
SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION!
given in this description and the extended
description in the relevant Design Guide The Safe Torque Off function does NOT isolate mains
voltage to the frequency converter or auxiliary circuits.
• Have a good knowledge of the generic and safety Perform work on electrical parts of the frequency converter
standards applicable to the specific application or the motor only after isolating the mains voltage supply
User is defined as: and waiting the length of time specified in 2.1 Safety and
Warnings. Failure to isolate the mains voltage supply from
the unit and waiting the time specified could result in
• integrator
death or serious injury.
• operator
• service technician • It is not recommended to stop the frequency

• maintenance technician converter by using the Safe Torque Off function.
If a running frequency converter is stopped by
Standards
using the function, the unit trips and stops by
Use of Safe Torque Off on terminal 37 requires fulfilling of
coasting. If unacceptable or dangerous, use
all provisions for safety, including relevant laws, regulations
another stop mode to stop the frequency
and guidelines. The optional Safe Torque Off function
converter and machinery, before using this
complies with the following standards.
function. Depending on the application, a
mechanical brake can be required.
• IEC 60204-1: 2005 category 0 – uncontrolled stop
• For synchronous and permanent magnet motor
• IEC 61508: 1998 SIL2 frequency converters, in a multiple IGBT power
• IEC 61800-5-2: 2007 – safe torque off (STO) semiconductor failure: In spite of the activation of
function the Safe Torque Off function, the system can
produce an alignment torque which maximally
• IEC 62061: 2005 SIL CL2
rotates the motor shaft by 180/p degrees. p
• ISO 13849-1: 2006 Category 3 PL d denotes the pole pair number.
• ISO 14118: 2000 (EN 1037) – prevention of • This function is suitable for performing
unexpected startup mechanical work on the system or affected area
The information and instructions of the instruction manual of a machine only. It does not provide electrical
are not sufficient for a proper and safe use of the Safe safety. Do not use this function as a control for
Torque Off functionality. The related information and starting and/or stopping the frequency converter.
instructions of the relevant Design Guide must be followed. To perform a safe installation of the frequency converter,
follow these steps:
Protective Measures
1. Remove the jumper wire between control
• Qualified and skilled personnel are required for
installation and commissioning of safety terminals 37 and 12 or 13. Cutting or breaking
engineering systems the jumper is not sufficient to avoid short-
circuiting. (See jumper on Figure 2.2.)
• The unit must be installed in an IP54 cabinet or
in an equivalent environment. In special 2. Connect an external Safety monitoring relay via a
applications, a higher IP degree is required NO safety function to terminal 37 (Safe Torque
Off) and either terminal 12 or 13 (24 V DC).
• The cable between terminal 37 and the external Follow the instruction for the safety device. The
safety device must be short circuit protected Safety monitoring relay must comply with
according to ISO 13849-2 table D.4 Category 3 /PL “d” (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 2 (EN
62061).

Example with STO
130BA874.10
A safety relay evaluates the E-Stop button signals and
triggers an STO function on the frequency converter in the
2 2
event of an activation of the E-Stop button (See Figure 2.4).
This safety function corresponds to a category 0 stop
12/13 37
(uncontrolled stop) in accordance with IEC 60204-1. If the
function is triggered during operation, the motor runs
down in an uncontrolled manner. The power to the motor
is safely removed, so that no further movement is possible.
It is not necessary to monitor plant at a standstill. If an
external force effect can occur, provide additional
measures to prevent any potential movement (for example
mechanical brakes).
NOTICE!
For all applications with Safe Torque Off it is important
that short circuit in the wiring to T37 can be excluded.
Exclude the short circuit as described in EN ISO 13849-2 D4
Figure 2.2 Jumper between Terminal 12/13 (24 V) and 37 by the use of protected wiring (shielded or segregated).
Example with SS1

1 SS1 corresponds to a controlled stop, stop category 1
130BC971.10
according to IEC 60204-1 (see Figure 2.5). When activating

2 the safety function, the frequency converter performs a
normal controlled stop. This can be activated through
terminal 27. After the safe delay time has expired on the
12
external safety module, the STO will be triggered and
3
terminal 37 will be set low. Ramping down as configured
in the frequency converter. If the frequency converter is
not stopped after the safe delay time, the activation of
STO will coast the frequency converter.
NOTICE!
When using the SS1 function, the brake ramp of the
frequency converter is not monitored with respect to
37 safety.
5 4
Example with Category 4/PL e application
Figure 2.3 Installation to Achieve a Stopping Category 0 (EN Where the safety control system design requires two
60204-1) with Cat. 3 /PL “d” (ISO 13849-1) or SIL 2 (EN 62061). channels for the STO function to achieve Category 4/PL e,
implement one channel via Safe Torque Off T37 (STO) and
the other by a contactor. Connect the contactor in either
1 Frequency converter the frequency converter input or output power circuits and
2 [Reset] key controlled by the Safety relay (see Figure 2.6). The
3 Safety relay (cat. 3, PL d or SIL2 contactor must be monitored through an auxiliary guided
4 Emergency stop button contact, and connected to the reset input of the Safety
5 Short-circuit protected cable (if not inside installation IP54 Relay.
cabinet) Paralleling of Safe Torque Off input the one Safety Relay
Safe Torque Off inputs T37 (STO) may be connected
Table 2.2 Legend to Figure 2.3
directly if it is required to control multiple frequency
converters from the same control line via one Safety Relay
Safe Torque Off Commissioning Test
(see Figure 2.7). Connecting inputs increases the probability
After installation and before first operation, perform a
of a fault in the unsafe direction. A fault in one frequency
commissioning test of the installation using Safe Torque
converter can result in all frequency converters becoming
Off. Moreover, perform the test after each modification of
enabled. The probability of a fault for T37 is so low, that
the installation.

the resulting probability still meets the requirements for
130BC974.10
2 2 1 2
SIL2. K1
1
130BC972.10
12
2
12
3
37
K1
4
K1
37
4
Figure 2.4 STO Example
Figure 2.6 STO Category 4 Example

1 Frequency converter
2 [Reset] key
3 Safety relay 1 Frequency converter
4 Emergency stop 2 [Reset] key
3 Safety relay
4 Emergency stop
1
130BC973.10
12
18
37
4
Figure 2.5 SS1 Example
1 Frequency converter
2 [Reset] key
3 Safety relay
4 Emergency stop

1 1. Activate the Safe Torque Off function by

2 2
130BC975.10
removing the 24 V DC voltage supply to the
3
2 terminal 37.
2. After activation of Safe Torque Off (that is, after
12
the response time), the frequency converter
coasts (stops creating a rotational field in the
motor). The response time is typically less than 10
ms.
4 The frequency converter is guaranteed not to restart
creation of a rotational field by an internal fault (in
accordance with Cat. 3 of EN 954-1, PL d acc. EN ISO
20 13849-1 and SIL 2 acc. EN 62061). After activation of Safe
Torque Off, the display shows the text ”Safe Stop
37
activated”. The associated help text says, "Safe Stop has
been activated. This means that the Safe Torque Off has
5 been activated, or that normal operation has not been
1
resumed yet after Safe Torque Off activation”.
20 NOTICE!
The requirements of Cat. 3 (EN 954-1)/PL “d” (ISO 13849-1)
37
are only fulfilled while 24 V DC supply to terminal 37 is
kept removed or low by a safety device which itself fulfills
1
Cat. 3 (EN 954-1) PL “d” (ISO 13849-1). If external forces act
on the motor, it must not operate without additional
measures for fall protection. External forces can arise for
example, in the event of vertical axis (suspended loads)
20
where an unwanted movement, for example caused by
37 gravity, could cause a hazard. Fall protection measures can
be additional mechanical brakes.
Figure 2.7 Paralleling of Multiple Drives Example
By default the Safe Torque Off function is set to an
Unintended Restart Prevention behaviour. Therefore, to
1 Frequency converter resume operation after activation of Safe Torque Off,
2 24 V DC 1. reapply 24 V DC voltage to terminal 37 (text Safe
3 [Reset] key Torque Off activated is still displayed)
4 Safety relay
2. create a reset signal (via bus, Digital I/O, or
5 Emergency stop
[Reset] key.
The Safe Torque Off function can be set to an Automatic
WARNING Restart behaviour. Set the value of 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe

Stop from default value [1] to value [3].
Safe Torque Off activation (that is removal of 24 V DC Automatic Restart means that Safe Torque Off is
voltage supply to terminal 37) does not provide electrical terminated, and normal operation is resumed, as soon as
safety. The Safe Torque Off function itself is therefore not the 24 V DC are applied to Terminal 37. No Reset signal is
sufficient to implement the Emergency-Off function as required.
defined by EN 60204-1. Emergency-Off requires measures
of electrical isolation, for example, by switching off mains
via an additional contactor.

2 2 WARNING state, and the mechanical brake (if connected)

remains activated.
Automatic Restart Behaviour is permitted in one of the two 1.4 Send Reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or
situations: [Reset] key). The test step is passed when the
1. The Unintended Restart Prevention is motor becomes operational again.
implemented by other parts of the Safe Torque
Off installation. The commissioning test is passed if all four test steps 1.1,
1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 are passed.
2. A presence in the dangerous zone can be
physically excluded when Safe Torque Off is not Case 2: Automatic Restart of Safe Torque Off is wanted
activated. In particular, paragraph 5.3.2.5 of ISO and allowed (that is, Safe Torque Off only where
12100-2 2003 must be observed 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop is set to [3], or combined Safe
Stop and MCB 112 where 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop is set
to [7] PTC 1 & Relay W or [8] PTC 1 & Relay A/W):
2.2.2 Safe Torque Off Commissioning Test 2.1 Remove the 24 V DC voltage supply to
terminal 37 by the interrupt device while the
After installation and before first operation, perform a frequency converter drives the motor (that is
commissioning test of an installation or application, using mains supply is not interrupted). The test step is
Safe Torque Off. passed when
Perform the test again after each modification of the
installation or application involving the Safe Torque Off.
• the motor reacts with a coast, and
• the mechanical brake is activated (if

connected)
NOTICE!
A passed commissioning test is mandatory after first instal- • the alarm “Safe Stop [A68]” is displayed
lation and after each change to the safety installation. in the LCP, if mounted
2.2 Reapply 24 V DC to terminal 37.
The commissioning test (select one of cases 1 or 2 as If the motor becomes operational again, The test step is
applicable): passed. If both test steps 2.1 and 2.2 are passed, the
commissioning test is passed.
Case 1: Restart prevention for Safe Torque Off is required
(that is Safe Torque Off only where 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
NOTICE!
Stop is set to default value [1], or combined Safe Torque See warning on the restart behaviour in 2.2.1 Terminal 37
Off and MCB 112 where 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop is set Safe Torque Off Function
to [6] PTC 1 & Relay A or [9] PTC 1 & Relay W/A):
1.1 Remove the 24 V DC voltage supply to
terminal 37 using the interrupt device while the
WARNING
The Safe Torque Off function can be used for
frequency converter drives the motor (that is
asynchronous, synchronous and permanent magnet
mains supply is not interrupted). The test step is
motors. Two faults can occur in the power semiconductor
passed when
of the frequency converter. When using synchronous or
• the motor reacts with a coast, and permanent magnet motors a residual rotation can result
• the mechanical brake is activated (if from the faults. The rotation can be calculated to Angle =
connected) 360/(Number of Poles). The application using synchronous
or permanent magnet motors must take this residual
• the alarm “Safe Torque Off [A68]” is
rotation into consideration and ensure that it does not
displayed in the LCP, if mounted
pose a safety risk. This situation is not relevant for
1.2 Send Reset signal (via Bus, Digital I/O, or asynchronous motors.
[Reset] key). The test step is passed if the motor
remains in the Safe Torque Off state, and the
mechanical brake (if connected) remains
activated.
1.3 Reapply 24 V DC to terminal 37. The test step
is passed if the motor remains in the coasted

How to Install Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
3 How to Install
3 3
3.1 Environment 3.2 Mechanical Installation
3.1.1 Ambient Temperature and Altitude 3.2.1 Accessory Bags
The normal ambient temperature supported by the CDS is Find the following parts included in the accessory bag:
-14000000 °F to +122 °F without derating. The CDS
operates normally down to -4 °F with only the LCP display
130BT330.10
function impaired but without performance reduction.
For ambient temperatures above +122 °F, it is mandatory

to integrate the derating output factor for the maximum
compressor electrical motor power/current.
For altitudes above 3280 ft (1000 m), apply derating as

shown in Table 3.1.
Figure 3.1 Enclosures B1 and B2, IP21/IP55/Type 1/Type 12
For more details on derating due to environmental factors,
contact Danfoss technical support.
130BT346.10
Altitude [ft/m] Derating factor
3280/1000 1 61 68
39 42 50
53 54
4921/1500 0.95 RELAY

1
RELAY 2
6561/2000 0.90
01
03 02
04
06 05
WARNING
8202/2500 0.86 Risk of Electric
Discunnect
mains and
:
Shock - Dual
supply
loadsharing
before service
9842/3000 0.82
Figure 3.2 Enclosure B3, IP20/Chassis
11482/3500 0.78
Table 3.1 Altitude Derating Factor

130BT347.10
01
03 02
06 05 04 61 68
39 42 50
53 54 5
3.1.2 Environmental Requirements for

WARNING:
Risk of Electric
Disconnect Shock - Dual supply
mains and
loadsharing
before service
Mechanical Installation 95
99
The unit is air-cooled. To protect the unit from

overheating, ensure that the ambient temperature does
Figure 3.3 Enclosure B4, IP20/Chassis
not exceed the maximum temperature stated for the 24-
hour average temperature. If the ambient temperature is in
the range of 113 °F to 131 °F, derating becomes relevant.
130BA406.10
A C D
If derating for ambient temperature is not taken into 61 68 6

B
39 42 50 53 54 5
account, the service life of the unit is reduced.

03 02 01 06 05 04
E
F
G H
I
J K
WARNING:
ISOA0021
Risk of Electric Shock - Dual supply

Disconnect mains and loadsharing before service
Figure 3.4 Enclosures C1 and C2, IP55/66/Type 1/Type 12

130BT348.10
130BA419.10
RELAY 1
RELAY 2
01
03 02
06 05 04 61 68
39 42 50
53 54 5
WARNIN
Risk of G:
DisconnElectric Shock
ect mains - Dual supply
and loadsha
ring before
service
95
a
3 3 99
Figure 3.5 Enclosure C3, IP20/Chassis
3.2.2 Mechanical Mounting
1. Drill holes in accordance with the measurements

given.
2. Provide screws suitable for the surface on which
the compressor drive should be mounted.
3. Retighten all four screws. b
The frequency converter IP20 allows side-by-side instal-
lation. Because of the need for cooling, there must be a
minimum of 7.9 in (200 mm) free air passage above and
Figure 3.6 Clearance
below the frequency converter.
The back wall must always be solid. All frequency
converters are equipped with a back metal plate to
guarantee proper heat exchanger ventilation. Never A1*/A2/A3/A4/A5/ B2/B3/B4/C
Frame size C2/C4
remove this metal sheet. B1 1/C3
a [Inch/mm] 3.3/100 7.9/200 8.9/225
b [inch/mm] 3.3/100 7.9/200 8.9/225
Table 3.2 Air Passage for Different Frame Sizes

3.2.3 Mechanical Dimensions
IP 20 Chassis T2 [240 V] T4 [480 V] T6 [575 V]

VSH088 [15 kW] B4 B3 B3
VSH117 [18 kW] C3 B4 B4 3 3
VSH170 [22 kW] C3 B4 B4
IP 55 NEMA 12
VSH088 [15 kW] C1 B1 B1
VSH117 [18 kW] C1 B2 B2
VSH170 [22 kW] C1 B2 B2
Table 3.3 Related VSH Numbers
130BA219.10
130BA228.11
1
Table 3.4 Dimensional Drawings
B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C3
Height [inch/mm]
Backplate A 18.90/480 25.59/650 15.71/399 20.47/520 26.77/680 21.65/550
Distance between mounting holes a 17.87//454 24.57/624 14.96/380 19.49/495 25.51/648 20.51/521
Width [inch/mm]
Back plate B 9.53/242 9.53/242 6.50/165 9.06/230 12.13/308 12.13/308
Distance between mounting holes b 8.28/210 8.28/210 5.51/140 7.87/200 10.71/272 10.63/270
Depth [inch/mm]
Without option C 10.24/260 10.24/260 9.80/249 9.53/242 12.21/310 13.11/333
With option C 10.24/260 10.24/260 10.24/260 9.53/242 12.21/310 13.11/333
Screw holes [inch/mm]
c 0.47/12.0 0.47/12.0 0.32 0.49/12.0
d Ø 0.75/19.0 Ø 0.75/19.0 0.47/12.0 Ø 0.75/19.0
e Ø 0.35/9 Ø 0.35/9 0.34/8.8 0.33/8.5 Ø 0.35/9 0.33/8.5
f 0.35/9 0.35/9 0.31/7.9 0.59/15 0.38/9.8 0.67/17
Other Specifications
Max. weight [lbs/kg] 50.4/23 59.53/27 26.46/12 51.81/23.5 99.21/45 77.16/35
Table 3.5 Mechanical Dimensions

3.3 Electrical Installation

3.3.1 Cables General
3 3 CAUTION
Cables general:
Always comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections.
Frame 200-240 V 380-500 V 525-690 V Cable for Tightening torque

size [kW] [kW] [kW] [Nm]
Mains, motor cables 1.8
B1 5.5-7.5 11-15 15 Relay 0.5-0.6
Ground 2-3
Mains 4.5
Motor cables 4.5
B2 11 18.5-22 18.5-22
Relay 0.5-0.6
Ground 2-3
B3 5.5-7.5 11-15 15 Relay 0.5-0.6
Ground 2-3
B4 11-15 18.5-30 18.5-22 Relay 0.5-0.6
Ground 2-3
Mains, motor cables 10
C3 18.5-22 - - Relay 0.5-0.6
Ground 2-3
Table 3.6 Tightening Torque
3.3.2 Removal of Knockouts for Extra Cables
• Remove cable entry from the frequency converter (avoiding foreign parts in the frequency converter when
removing knockouts)
• Support cable entry around the knockout that should be removed
• The knockout can now be removed with a strong mandrel and a hammer
• Remove burrs from the hole
• Mount cable entry on frequency converter

3.3.3 Mains Connection for B1, B2 and B3
130BA720.10
NOTICE!
Frequency converter sizes differ, but terminal numbers are
always the same. Incoming power is always 91, 92, 93 3 3
labeled L1, L2, L3.
NOTICE!
For correct cable dimensions see 8 General Specifications.
130BT332.10
Figure 3.9 How to Connect to Mains and Grounding for B3 with

RFI
3.3.4 Mains connection for B4, C1 and C3
NOTICE!
Frequency converter sizes differ but terminal numbers are
always the same. Incoming power is always 91, 92, 93
labeled L1, L2, L3.
Figure 3.7 How to Connect to Mains and Grounding for B1 and
130BA714.10
B2
L1 91
L2 92
L3 93
Figure 3.8 How to Connect to Mains and Grounding for B3
without RFI
L1 91
L2 92
L3 93
U 96
V 97 W
95 98 DC-88
DC+89
R-81
R+82
99
Figure 3.10 How to Connect to Mains and Grounding for B4

3.3.5 Motor Compressor Connection
130BA389.10
NOTICE!
Always wire terminal 96 (U) to T1, 97 (V) to T2, and 98 (W)
3 3 to T3.
91 92 93
L1 L2 L3
130BC399.10
95
Figure 3.13 Motor/Compressor Wiring
Motor compressor cable must be screened/armored. If an

unscreened/unarmored cable is used, some EMC
requirements are out of compliance. For more information,
see EMC specifications.
1. Fasten decoupling plate to the bottom of the
frequency converter with screws and washers
from the accessory bag.
Figure 3.11 How to Connect to Mains and Grounding for C1 and
2. Attach motor compressor cable to terminals 96
C2
(U), 97 (V), 98 (W).
3. Connect to ground connection (terminal 99) on
decoupling plate with screws from the accessory
130BA718.10
bag.
4. Insert terminals 96 (U), 97 (V), 98 (W) and motor
91 9
2 93 compressor cable to terminals labeled MOTOR.
5. Fasten screened cable to decoupling plate with
screws and washers from the accessory bag.
6. Connect U, V, W for motor compressor clockwise.
95
91 9
2 93
96
97 9
8
88 8 99
9
81 8
2
Figure 3.12 How to Connect C3 to Mains and Grounding

3.3.7 Electrical Installation of Motor
130BT333.10
Compressor Cables
Screening of cables
Avoid installation with twisted screen ends (pigtails). They 3 3
reduce the screening effect at higher frequencies.
Cable length and cross section

The frequency converter has been tested with a given
length of cable and a given cross section of that cable. If
the cross section is increased, the cable capacitance - and
Figure 3.14 How to Connect to Motor Terminals B1/B2 thus the leakage current - may increase, and the cable
length must be reduced correspondingly.
130BT336.10
Aluminum conductors
L3
L 2 93
Aluminium conductors are not recommended. Terminals
L1
91
92
accept aluminium conductors, but clean the conductor
surface and remove and seal the oxidation by neutral acid-
free Vaseline grease before the conductor is connected.
Furthermore, the terminal screw must be retightened after
two days due to the softness of the aluminium. It is crucial
to keep the connection a gas tight joint, otherwise the
Figure 3.15 How to Connect to Mains and Ground without aluminium surface oxidizes again.
Mains Disconnect
3.3.8 Compressor Motor Protection
3.3.6 Motor Compressors Cables The frequency converter fully provides electrical
compressor motor protection.
Correct dimensioning of motor compressor cable cross-
section and length is described in the application manual. • The frequency converter makes through an
electronic current measurement anti-overload and
• Use a screened/armored motor compressor cable lock-rotor compressor motor protection (see
to comply with EMC emission specifications description in the application manual).
• Keep the motor compressor cable as short as • The frequency converter is protected against
possible to reduce the noise level and leakage short circuits on compressor terminals T1, T2, T3
currents
• If a mains phase is missing, the frequency
• Connect the motor compressor cable screen to converter trips or issues a warning (depending on
both the decoupling plate of the frequency the load)
converters and to the metal cabinet of the motor
compressor
• If a compressor motor phase is missing, the
frequency converter trips
• Make the screen connections with the largest
• The frequency converter is protected against
possible surface area (cable clamp). Use the ground faults on compressor motor terminals T1,
supplied installation devices in the frequency T2, T3
converter for making the screen connections.

3.3.9 Access to Control Terminals
130BA012.12
130BT248.10
3 3
3
55
54
53
50
42
39
37
69 20
68
61 33
32
29
27 4
19
2 18
13
12
Figure 3.16 B3, B4 and C3 Enclosures

Figure 3.18 Control Terminals
130BT334.10
1. 10 pole plug digital I/O

2. 3 pole plug RS-485 Bus
3. 6 pole analog I/O
4. USB Connection
To mount the cable to the terminal:
1. Strip isolation of 9-10 mm.

2. Insert a screwdriver in the square hole.
3. Insert the cable in the adjacent circular hole.
4. Remove the screwdriver. The cable is now
mounted to the terminal.
130BT312.10
Figure 3.17 C1, B1 and B2 Enclosures
Control terminals are located beneath the LCP. The inside

of the removable cover shows the terminals.
Figure 3.19 Mounting the Cable

To remove the cable from the terminal: 2. Connect terminals 18, 27 and 37 to +24 V
(terminal 12/13)
1. Insert a screwdriver in the square hole. Default settings:
18 = start
2. Pull out the cable.
27 = coast inverse 3 3
130BT311.10
Figure 3.20 Removing the Cable

130BA150.10
Figure 3.23 Example of Basic Wiring
9 - 10 mm
(0.37 in)
Figure 3.21 Stripping the Cable
3.3.10 Basic Wiring Example
1. Mount terminals from the accessory bag to the

front of the frequency converter.
130BT306.10
Figure 3.22 Mounting the Terminals

3.3.11 Electrical Installation, Control Cables
Use terminal 37 as input for safe stop. In rare cases, control cables more than 100 m (330 ft) and analog signals result in
50/60 Hz ground loops due to noise from mains supply cables. If this situation occurs, break the screen or insert a 100 nF
3 3 capacitor between screen and chassis. Connect the digital and analog inputs and outputs separately to the frequency
converter common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) to avoid ground currents affecting the system.
Figure 3.24 Electrical Diagram - Control Cables
Control cables must be shielded/armored. To connect the screen to the frequency converter decoupling plate for control
cables, use a clamp from the accessory bag.

e. Cables for serial communication
130BT340.10
Eliminate low-frequency noise currents between two
frequency converters by connecting one end of the screen
to terminal 61. This terminal is connected to ground via an
internal RC link. To reduce the differential mode
interference between the conductors, use twisted-pair
3 3
cables.
Figure 3.25 Control Cable Connection
Figure 3.26 indicates how correct grounding is carried out

and what to do if in doubt.
a. Correct grounding
Control cables and cables for serial communication must
be fitted with cable clamps at both ends to ensure the
best possible electrical contact.
b. Wrong grounding
Do not use twisted cable ends (pigtails). They increase the
screen impedance at high frequencies.
c. Protection concerning ground potential between PLC

(Program Logic Controller) and frequency converter
If the ground potential between the frequency converter
and the PLC (etc.) is different, electric noise may occur that
disturbs the entire system. Solve this problem by fitting an
equalizing cable, next to the control cable. Minimum cable
cross-section: 16 mm2.
Figure 3.26 Examples of ground Wiring
d. For 50/60 Hz ground loops

If long control cables are used, 50/60 Hz ground loops may
occur. Solve this problem by connecting one end of the
screen to ground via a 100 nF capacitor (keeping leads
short).

3.3.12 Electrical Installation - EMC • Connect the screen/armor/conduit to ground at

Protection both ends for motor compressor cables as well as
for control cables. In some cases, it is not possible
The following is a guideline to good engineering practice to connect the screen in both ends. If so, connect
3 3 when installing frequency converters. To comply with EN the screen at the frequency converter. See also
3.3.11 Electrical Installation, Control Cables.
61800-3 First environment, follow these guidelines. If the
installation is in EN 61800-3 Second environment, i.e. • Avoid terminating the screen/armor with twisted
industrial networks, or in an installation with its own ends (pigtails). It increases the high frequency
transformer, deviation from these guidelines is allowed, impedance of the screen, which reduces its
but not recommended. effectiveness at high frequencies. Use low
impedance cable clamps or EMC cable glands
Good engineering practice to ensure EMC-correct electrical instead.
installation
• Avoid using unscreened/unarmored motor
compressor or control cables inside cabinets
• Use only braided screened/armored motor housing the frequency converter(s).
compressor cables and braided screened/armored
Leave the screen as close to the connectors as possible.
control cables. The screen should provide a
minimum coverage of 80%. The screen material
must be metal, not limited to but typically Figure 3.27 shows an example of an EMC-correct electrical
copper, aluminum, steel, or lead. There are no installation of an IP20 frequency converter.
special requirements for the mains cable. The frequency converter is fitted in an installation cabinet
with an output contactor and connected to a PLC, which is
• Installations using rigid metal conduits are not
installed in a separate cabinet. Other ways of doing the
required to use screened cable, but the motor
installation may have just as good an EMC performance,
compressor cable must be installed in conduit
provided the above guide lines to engineering practice are
separate from the control and mains cables. Full
followed. Installing without following the guideline, and
connection of the conduit from the frequency
using unscreened cables and control wires do not comply
converter to the motor compressor is required.
with all emission requirements, although the immunity
The EMC performance of flexible conduits varies a
requirements are fulfilled.
lot and information from the manufacturer must
be obtained.

3 3
Figure 3.27 EMC Correct Installation of an IP20 Frequency Converter

3.3.13 Safety Ground Connection
The frequency converter has a high leakage current and must be grounded appropriately for safety reasons according to EN
50178. The ground leakage current from the frequency converter exceeds 3.5 mA. To ensure a good mechanical connection
3 3 from the ground cable to the ground connection (terminal 95), the cable cross-section must be at least 10 mm2 or 2 rated
ground wires terminated separately.
3.3.14 Basic Examples of Control Connections
Controls using an external controller with 0-10 V signal. It is not necessary to change any parameters, as this is the default
value.
Figure 3.28 Example of External Controller with 0-10 V Signal
Controls using an external controller with 4-20 mA signal. Change switch 53 from U to I. It is not necessary to change any
parameters, as this is the default value.
130BC398.10
Figure 3.29 Example of External Controller with 4-20 mA Signal

3.3.15 High-voltage Test 3.4.2 Recommendations
Carry out a high-voltage test by short-circuiting terminals

U, V, W, L1, L2 and L3. Energize by max. 2.15 kV DC for 1 s
WARNING
between this short circuit and the chassis. In case of malfunction, ignoring recommended fuse types
may result in personnel risk and damage to the frequency
3 3
converter and other equipment.
NOTICE!
When running high-voltage tests of the entire installation,
The following tables list the recommended rated current.
frequency converter and compressor electrical motor
Recommended fuses are of the type gG for small to
compressor test can be conducted together.
medium power sizes. For larger powers, aR fuses are
recommended. For circuit breakers, Moeller types have
WARNING been tested to have a recommendation. Other circuit
breakers may be used if they limit the energy into the
When conducting a high-voltage test, make sure that the
frequency converter to a level equal to or lower than the
system is not under vacuum: a vacuum may cause
Moeller types.
electrical motor compressor failure.
For further information, see Application Note Fuses and

WARNING Circuit Breakers, MN90T
Never apply the high-voltage test to the control circuit.
3.4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers

3.4.1 Fuses
NOTICE!
To ensure compliance with IEC 60364 for CE or NEC 2009
for UL, use fuses and/or circuit breakers on the supply side
of the unit for protection of electrical components within
the frequency converter.
WARNING
Personnel and property must be protected against the
consequence of component break-down internally in the
frequency converter.
Branch Circuit Protection

To protect the installation against electrical and fire hazard,
all branch circuits in an installation, switch gear, machines
etc., must be protected against short circuit and over-
current according to national/international regulations.
NOTICE!
The recommendations given do not provide UL branch
circuit protection.
Danfoss recommends using the fuses/circuit breakers listed

in the following tables to protect service personnel and
property in case of component break-down in the

3.4.3 CE Compliance
Fuses or circuit breakers are mandatory to comply with IEC 60364. Danfoss recommends using a selection of the following.
3 3 The fuses below are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering 100,000 Arms (symmetrical), 240 V, 480 V, 500 V, or
600 V depending on the unit's voltage rating. With the proper fusing, the frequency converter short circuit current rating
(SCCR) is 100,000 Arms.
3.4.4 Fuse Specifications
Enclosure Power [kW] Recommended Recommended Recommended circuit Max trip level [A]
Size fuse size Max. fuse breaker
Moeller
B1 5.5-7.5 gG-25 (5.5) gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
gG-32 (7.5)
B2 11 gG-50 gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
B3 5.5 gG-25 gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
B4 7.5-15 gG-32 (7.5) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-50 (11)
gG-63 (15)
C1 15-22 gG-63 (15) gG-160 (15-18.5) NZMB2-A200 160
gG-80 (18.5) aR-160 (22)
gG-100 (22)
C2 30-37 aR-160 (30) aR-200 (30) NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (37) aR-250 (37)
C3 18.5-22 gG-80 (18.5) gG-150 (18.5) NZMB2-A200 150
aR-125 (22) aR-160 (22)
C4 30-37 aR-160 (30) aR-200 (30) NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (37) aR-250 (37)
Table 3.7 200-240 V, Frame Sizes B and C
Moeller
B1 11-15 gG-40 gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
B2 18.5-22 gG-50 (18.5) gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (22)
B3 11-15 gG-40 gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
B4 18.5-30 gG-50 (18.5) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-63 (22)
gG-80 (30)
C1 30-45 gG-80 (30) gG-160 NZMB2-A200 160
gG-100 (37)
gG-160 (45)
C2 55-75 aR-200 (55) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-250 (75)
C3 37-45 gG-100 (37) gG-150 (37) NZMB2-A200 150
gG-160 (45) gG-160 (45)
C4 55-75 aR-200 (55) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-250 (75)

Moeller
B1 11-18 gG-25 (11) gG-80 PKZM4-63 63
gG-32 (15)
B2 22-30
gG-40 (18.5)
gG-50 (22) gG-100 NZMB1-A100 100
3 3
gG-63 (30)
B3 11-15 gG-25 (11) gG-63 PKZM4-50 50
gG-32 (15)
B4 18.5-30 gG-40 (18.5) gG-125 NZMB1-A100 100
gG-50 (22)
gG-63 (30)
C1 37-55 gG-63 (37) gG-160 (37-45) NZMB2-A200 160
gG-100 (45) aR-250 (55)
aR-160 (55)
C2 75 aR-200 (75) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
C3 37-45 gG-63 (37) gG-150 NZMB2-A200 150
gG-100 (45)
C4 55-75 aR-160 (55) aR-250 NZMB2-A250 250
aR-200 (75)
UL Compliance
Fuses or circuit breakers are mandatory to comply with NEC 2009. Danfoss recommends using a selection of the following.
The fuses below are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering 100,000 Arms (symmetrical), 240 V, 480 V, 500 V, or
600 V depending on the unit's voltage rating. With the proper fusing, the frequency converter’s Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) is 100,000 Arms.
Recommended max. fuse

Power
Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann
[kW]
11 KTN-R-80 JKS-80 JJN-80 - - -
15-18.5 KTN-R-125 JKS-125 JJN-125 - - -
22 KTN-R-150 JKS-150 JJN-150 - - -
30 KTN-R-200 JKS-200 JJN-200 - - -
37 KTN-R-250 JKS-250 JJN-250 - - -

Power[kW] Ferraz- Ferraz-
SIBA Littel fuse
Shawmut Shawmut
Type RK1 Type RK1 Type CC Type RK1
11 5014006-080 KLN-R-80 - A2K-80-R
15-18.5 2028220-125 KLN-R-125 - A2K-125-R
22 2028220-150 KLN-R-150 - A2K-150-R
30 2028220-200 KLN-R-200 - A2K-200-R
37 2028220-250 KLN-R-250 - A2K-250-R


Power[kW] Ferraz- Ferraz-
Bussmann Littel fuse
Shawmut Shawmut
Type JFHR21) JFHR2 JFHR22) J
11 FWX-80 - - HSJ-80
3 3 15-18.5
22
FWX-125
FWX-150
-
L25S-150
-
A25X-150
HSJ-125
HSJ-150
30 FWX-200 L25S-200 A25X-200 HSJ-200
37 FWX-250 L25S-250 A25X-250 HSJ-250
1) FWH-fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for 240 V frequency converters.
2) A50X fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A25X for 240 V frequency converters.

Power
[kW]
Type RK1 Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
11 KTS-R-40 JKS-40 JJS-40 - - -
15 KTS-R-50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
18 KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
22 KTS-R-80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
30 KTS-R-100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
37 KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 - - -
45 KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
55 KTS-R-200 JKS-200 JJS-200 - - -
75 KTS-R-250 JKS-250 JJS-250 - - -

Power Ferraz- Ferraz-
SIBA Littel fuse
[kW] Shawmut Shawmut
Type RK1 Type RK1 Type CC Type RK1
11 5014006-040 KLS-R-40 - A6K-40-R
15 5014006-050 KLS-R-50 - A6K-50-R
18 5014006-063 KLS-R-60 - A6K-60-R
22 2028220-100 KLS-R-80 - A6K-80-R
30 2028220-125 KLS-R-100 - A6K-100-R
37 2028220-125 KLS-R-125 - A6K-125-R
45 2028220-160 KLS-R-150 - A6K-150-R
55 2028220-200 KLS-R-200 - A6K-200-R
75 2028220-250 KLS-R-250 - A6K-250-R


Power
Bussmann Ferraz-Shawmut Ferraz-Shawmut Littel fuse
[kW]
JFHR2 J JFHR21) JFHR2
11
15
FWH-40
FWH-50
HSJ-40
HSJ-50
-
-
-
- 3 3
18 FWH-60 HSJ-60 - -
22 FWH-80 HSJ-80 - -
30 FWH-100 HSJ-100 - -
37 FWH-125 HSJ-125 - -
45 FWH-150 HSJ-150 - -
55 FWH-200 HSJ-200 A50-P-225 L50-S-225
75 FWH-250 HSJ-250 A50-P-250 L50-S-250
1) Ferraz-Shawmut A50QS fuses may substitute for A50P fuses.

Power
[kW]
Type RK1 Type J Type T Type CC Type CC Type CC
11 KTS-R-35 JKS-35 JJS-35 - - -
15 KTS-R-45 JKS-45 JJS-45 - - -
18 KTS-R-50 JKS-50 JJS-50 - - -
22 KTS-R-60 JKS-60 JJS-60 - - -
30 KTS-R-80 JKS-80 JJS-80 - - -
37 KTS-R-100 JKS-100 JJS-100 - - -
45 KTS-R-125 JKS-125 JJS-125 - - -
55 KTS-R-150 JKS-150 JJS-150 - - -
75 KTS-R-175 JKS-175 JJS-175 - - -

Ferraz- Ferraz-
Power [kW] SIBA Littel fuse
Shawmut Shawmut
Type RK1 Type RK1 Type RK1 J
11 5014006-040 KLS-R-035 A6K-35-R HSJ-35
15 5014006-050 KLS-R-045 A6K-45-R HSJ-45
18 5014006-050 KLS-R-050 A6K-50-R HSJ-50
22 5014006-063 KLS-R-060 A6K-60-R HSJ-60
30 5014006-080 KLS-R-075 A6K-80-R HSJ-80
37 5014006-100 KLS-R-100 A6K-100-R HSJ-100
45 2028220-125 KLS-R-125 A6K-125-R HSJ-125
55 2028220-150 KLS-R-150 A6K-150-R HSJ-150
75 2028220-200 KLS-R-175 A6K-175-R HSJ-175
1)170M fuses shown from Bussmann use the -/80 visual indicator. –TN/80 Type T, -/110 or TN/110 Type T indicator
fuses of the same size and amperage may be substituted.

3.5 Application Example

3.5.1 BASIC Cascade/Pack Controller
3 3
130BC400.10
Figure 3.30 Example of BASIC Cascade/Pack Controller

The BASIC Cascade/Pack Controller is used for up to 3 running on the frequency converter or running
compressors to control up to two on/off compressors on the mains
together with one variable speed compressor. The capacity
control is typically based on suction pressure feedback, but
• Pack Status, is a readout of the status for the
Pack Controller. The display shows that the Pack
it could also be e.g. a cold room temperature.
Controller is disabled, all compressors are off, and 3 3
emergency has stopped all compressors, all
Fixed Lead Compressor compressors are running, fixed speed
The BASIC Pack Controller allows the frequency converter compressors are being staged/destaged.
to control up to 3 compressors using the frequency
converter's two built-in relays. The variable compressor • If a no load need occurs, then destaging ensures
that all fixed speed compressors are stopped
(lead) is connected directly to the frequency converter,
individually followed by the variable speed
while 2 bilt-in relays control the other 2 compressors.
compressor.
NOTICE!
Only one fixed speed compressor can be controlled with 3.5.3 Pack Compressor Wiring Diagram
the built-in relays. To control two fixed compressors, an
extra relay is needed via the MCB 105 Relay Option. The wiring diagram shows an example with the built-in
BASIC Cascade Controller with one variable speed
Bandwidth Management compressor (lead) and two fixed speed compressors, a 4-20
In pack control systems, to avoid frequent switching of mA transmitter and System Safety Interlock.
fixed speed compressors, the desired system load is kept
within a bandwidth rather than at a constant level. The
130BD448.10
L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3 L1/L2/L3
Staging Bandwidth provides the required bandwidth for
operation. When a large and quick change in system load
RELAY from MCB 105
occurs, the Override Bandwidth overrides the Staging

Power Section
Bandwidth to prevent immediate response to a short

duration load change. An Override Bandwidth Timer can
RELAY 2
be programmed to prevent staging until the system load

has stabilised and normal control established.
When the Pack Controller is enabled and running normally,
and the frequency converter issues a trip alarm, staging
and destaging fixed speed compressors maintain the
system head pressure. To prevent frequent staging and
destaging and minimise load fluctuations, a wider Fixed
Speed Bandwidth is used instead of the Staging
bandwidth.
3.5.2 System Status and Operation

Figure 3.31 Example with Built-in BASIC Cascade Controller
When the pack controller is enabled, the operation status
for each compressor and the pack controller is displayed in
the LCP. Information displayed includes:
• Compressor Status, is a readout of the status for

the relays assigned to each compressor. The
display shows compressors that are disabled, off,

130BX505.11
Power
Relay from
MCB 105
card
SAFE STOP
3 3
37
Figure 3.32 Example with Built-in BASIC Cascade Controller

Quick Set-up Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
4 Quick Set-up
3. Ready to Run: If the frequency converter is

supplied with display: Press [Hand On] to set a
4.1 Quick Set-up local speed reference in the display (good for
4.1.1 Basic Programming Procedures testing purposes). Press [Auto On] for running in
operation and with an external reference. 4 4
The following describes the basic procedure for running Figure 4.1 shows the screen after configuring the frequency
the frequency converter. converter for Speed Open loop application, Hand On mode.
CAUTION
When the connections are made, the compressor starts
automatically.
1. Connect the power supply to the terminals (L1,

L2 and L3) of the frequency converter as shown
in 3.3.4 Mains connection for B4, C1 and C3.
2. Connect motor cable between the frequency
converter (U, V & W) and Compressor (clockwise
on terminal), see 3.3.5 Motor Compressor Figure 4.1 Speed Open Loop, Hand On Mode
Connection. (The connectors utilized in these first
2 steps are provided in the accessory bag which
accompanies the frequency converter). This is what the screen will look like after configuring the
3. Press [Quick Menu] and go to quick setup. Ensure frequency converter for Speed Open loop application, Auto
that the correct compressor model is selected in On mode:
1-13 Compressor Selection.
4. Connect terminal 12 with terminal 18 (start
signal), terminal 12 with terminal 27 (inverse
coast signal) and terminal 12 with terminal 37*
(safe stop inverse signal).
*See 3.3.10 Basic Wiring Example and 2.2.1 Terminal 37 Safe
Torque Off Function.
CAUTION
If an error trips the frequency converter, it automatically
tries to restart the compressor after 30 s (unless the error
is severe and causes a trip lock). See also 14-20 Reset Mode Figure 4.2 Speed Open Loop, Auto On Mode
and 14-21 Automatic Restart Time.
4. Done.
4.1.2 Open Loop with External Reference
1. Apply analog speed reference signal (0-10 V) on 4.1.3 PID Closed Loop with 4-20 mA
terminal 53 using the terminal 55 as common. Pressure Transmitter
See 3.3.14 Basic Examples of Control Connections.
1. Connect pressure transmitter to analog input on
2. Check if switch A53 is positioned to U (voltage)
terminal 54 according to 3.3.14 Basic Examples of
instead of I (current). The switch A53 is on the
Control Connections.
frequency converter and is visible when the LCP
is removed. 2. Make sure that the switch for analogue input 54
is set to “I” for current input.

3. Press [Quick Menu], go to “PID Closed Loop” and Feedback [unit]. The pressure [psi] is going to be
then to “Basic PID Settings) menu. shown in the upper right corner of the display
Now change parameters to
This is what the screen will look like, after configuring the
1-00 Configuration Mode: Select [3] Process
frequency converter for Closed loop application.
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit: Select [71] Psi
3-02 Minimum Reference and 3-03 Maximum
Reference: Enter the lower and upper limits of the
4 4 setpoint range [psi].
3-15 Reference Resource 1: Select [0] No function
for fixed setpoint.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current + 6-23 Terminal 54
High Current: The values of these parameters
should match the output of the pressure
transmitter (4-20 mA for example is the factory
setting).
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value +
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value: Set range
Figure 4.3 Closed Loop
of pressure transmitter (factory setting -14/+174
psi)
Return to 3-13 Reference Site: Select [2] Local to
run with a fixed setpoint adjustable via LCP. 5. Ready to Run: Press [Hand On] and set reference
Select [1] Remote if the setpoint is given by the in psi using the arrows on the display. Before
analog input (as defined in 3-15 Reference leaving the site, never forget the next step.
Resource 1). 6. Ready to Run: Press [Auto On].
4. Press [Quick Menu], go to My Personal Menu, go For more details on PID Closed Loop, see Figure 4.4.
to 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small and select [1652]
Figure 4.4 Example of Closed Loop Application

4.1.4 Other Compressor Features
To set up other dedicated compressor features press [Quick Menu] and go to Q4 or follow Figure 4.5.
4 4
Figure 4.5 Flowchart

4 4

How to Program Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
5 How to Program
130BA018.13
5.1 How to Program on the Graphical LCP
5.1.1 Control Panel a
Status 1(0)
1234rpm 10,4A 43,5Hz
The following instructions are valid for the graphical LCP
(LCP 102):
The control panel is divided into four functional groups:
5 5
1 b
43,5Hz
1. Graphical display with Status lines. All data is
displayed in a graphical LCP display, which can
Run OK c
show up to five items of operating data while
displaying [Status].
Quick Main Alarm
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing 2 Status
Menu Menu Log
parameters and switching between display
functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
Ca
ck
n
Ba
ce
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
Info
3 On OK
Warn.
Alarm
Hand Auto
4 Off Reset
on on
Figure 5.1 Overview of LCP
5.1.2 Display Lines
a. Status line:
Status messages displaying icons and graphic.
b. Line 1-2:
Operator data lines displaying data defined or chosen by
the user. By pressing the [Status] key, up to one extra line
can be added.
c. Status line:
Status messages displaying text.
5.1.3 Display Contrast Adjustment
Press [Status] and [ ▼ ] for darker display

Press [Status] and [ ▲ ] for brighter display

5.1.4 Indicator Lights [Quick Menu] allows quick access to different Quick Menus
such as:
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or Q1 - My Personal Menu
warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on
Q2 - Quick Set-up
the control panel. The on LED is activated when the
frequency converter receives mains voltage. Q3 – PID Process Loop
Q4 - Compressor Functions
• Green LED/On: Control section is working.
Q5 - Changes Made
• Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
Q6 - Loggings
5 5 • Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm
Q7 - Load Profile
130BP044.10
Use [Quick Menu] for programming the parameters

belonging to the Quick Menu. It is possible to switch
On directly between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
5.2.2 Navigation Keys

Warn. The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the
different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu]
Alarm and [Alarm Log]. Press the keys to move the cursor.
[OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the
Figure 5.2 Indicator Lights
cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter and
loggings from Quick Menu.
5.2 LCP Keys 5.2.3 Local Control Keys

5.2.1 Function Keys
Local control keys for local control are found at the
bottom of the control panel.
The control keys are divided into functions. The keys
below the display and indicator lamps are used for
parameter set-up, including choice of display indication
during normal operation.
130BP045.10
Quick Main Alarm

Status 130BP046.10
Menu Menu Log
Figure 5.4 Local Control Keys

Figure 5.3 Function Keys
[Status] indicates the status of the frequency converter

and/or the compressor motor. Choose between 3 different
readouts by pressing the [Status] key: 5 line readouts, 4
line readouts or Smart Logic Control by pushing [Status]
twice.
Press [Status] to select the display mode or to change back
to Display mode from either Quick Menu mode, Main
Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also press [Status] to toggle
single or double read-out mode.

[Hand On] enables control of the frequency converter via 5.2.5 Data Storage in LCP
the LCP. [Hand on] also starts the motor compressor, and it
is now possible to enter the motor compressor speed data 1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy in the Main Menu.
by means of the arrow keys. The key can be selected as [1]
2. Press [OK].
Enable or [0] Disable via 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated by means of control signals 3. Select [1] All to LCP.
or a serial bus will override a “start“ command via the LCP. 4. Press [OK].
The following control signals will still be active when
[Hand on] is activated: All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated
by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
• [Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On]

NOTICE! 5 5
• Reset
Stop the motor compressor before performing this
• Coasting stop inverse operation. The LCP can now be connected to another
• Reversing frequency converter and the parameter settings copied to
this frequency converter as well.
• Set-up select lsb (least significant bit) - Set-up
select msb (most significant bit)
5.2.6 Initialization to Default Settings
• Stop command from serial communication
• Quick stop Initialize the frequency converter to default settings in two

ways:
• DC brake
[Off] stops the connected motor compressor. The key can
Recommended initialization (via 14-22 Operation Mode)
be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-41 [Off] Key on
1. Select 14-22 Operation Mode.
LCP.
If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is 2. Press [OK].
inactive the motor compressor can be stopped by discon- 3. Select [2] Initialization.
necting the voltage.
4. Press [OK].
[Auto On] enables the frequency converter is to be 5. Disconnect mains supply and wait until the
controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communi- display turns off.
cation. When a start signal is applied on the control 6. Reconnect the mains supply.
terminals and/or the bus, the frequency converter will
7. Drive initialized [A80] (Alarm 80) appears - the
start. The key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable
frequency converter is now reset.
via 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
14-22 Operation Mode initializes all except:
NOTICE!
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has • 8-30 Protocol
higher priority than the control keys [Hand on] and [Auto • 8-31 Address
on].
• 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
[Reset] is used for resetting the frequency converter after • 8-33 Parity / Stop Bits
an alarm (trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] • 8-34 Estimated cycle time
Disable via 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
• 8-35 Minimum Response Delay
The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding • 8-36 Max Response Delay
down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter • 8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay
shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.
• 14-50 RFI 1
5.2.4 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings • 15-00 Operating hours
• 15-01 Running Hours

Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete, • 15-02 kWh Counter
store the data in the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up
Software.
• 15-03 Power-ups

• 15-04 Over Temps 5.2.8 Parameter Selection

• 15-05 Over Volts
In the Main menu mode, the parameters are divided into
• 15-20 Historic Log: Event
groups. Use the navigation keys for selecting a parameter
• 15-21 Historic Log: Value group.
The following parameter groups are accessible:
• 15-22 Historic Log: Time
• 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code

• 0-** Operation/Display
• 15-31 Fault Log: Value
• 1-** Load/Motor
•
5 5 15-32 Fault Log: Time
Manual initialization
• 3-** Reference/Ramps
• 4-** Limits/Warnings
1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the display • 5-** Digital In/Out
turns off. • 6-** Analog In/Out
2. Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the same • 7-** Controls
time while power up for LCP 102, Graphical
Display.
• 8-** Comm. and Options
3. Release the keys after 5 s.

• 13-** Smart Logic
4. The frequency converter is now programmed

• 14-** Special Functions
according to default settings. • 15-** Drive Information
This procedure initializes all except: • 16-** Data Readouts
• 25-** Cascade Controller

• 15-00 Operating hours
• 28-** Compressor Functions
• 15-03 Power-ups
After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with
• 15-04 Over Temps the navigation keys. The middle section on the display
shows the parameter number and name as well as the
• 15-05 Over Volts
selected parameter value.
5.2.7 Data Transfer from LCP to Frequency

Converter
NOTICE!
Stop the motor compressor before performing this
operation.
1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy.

2. Press [OK].
3. Select [2] All from LCP.
4. Press [OK] again.
Figure 5.5 Display Example - Parameter Selection
The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now
transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].

5.2.9 Changing Data
The procedure for changing data is the same in both the

Quick menu and the Main menu mode.
Press [OK] to change the selected parameter. The

procedure for changing data depends on whether the
selected parameter represents a numerical data value or a
text value.
5.2.10 Changing a Text Value 5 5

If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text
value by pressing the [▲]/[▼] navigation keys. [▲] increases
the value and [▼] decreases the value. Place the cursor on
the value and press [OK] to save.
5.2.11 Changing a Group of Numeric Data

Values
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data value,

change it by pressing the navigation keys. Press [◀]/[▶] to
move the cursor horizontally. Press [▲]/[▼] to change the
data value. [▲] increases the data value, and [▼] decreases
the data value. Place the cursor on the value and press
[OK] to save.
Figure 5.6 Display Example

5 5

Parameter Descriptions Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
6 Parameter Descriptions
6.1 LCP Display

6.1.1 LCP Programming
Table 6.1 lists the parameters that cannot be changed from the LCP. These parameters are defined by the compressor
choice made in 1-13 Compressor Selection.
Parameter Parameter Parameter

1-01 Motor Control Principle 1-45 q-axis Inductance (Lq) 200% INOM 5-41 On Delay, Relay 6 6
1-03 Torque Characteristics 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM 5-42 Off Delay, Relay
1-04 Overload Mode 1-47 Low Speed Torque Calibration 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source
1-05 Local Mode Configuration 1-49 Current at min. inductance 7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain
1-10 Motor Construction 1-62 Slip Compensation 7-03 Speed PID Integral Time
1-20 Motor Power [kW] 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed 7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time
1-22 Motor Voltage 1-68 Minimum Inertia 7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
1-23 Motor Frequency 1-69 Maximum Inertia 13-10 Comparator Operand
1-24 Motor Current 1-71 Start Delay 13-11 Comparator Operator
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed 1-72 Start Function 13-12 Comparator Value
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque 1-73 Flying Start 14-00 Switching Pattern
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] 14-01 Switching Frequency
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) 1-76 Start Current 14-10 Line Failure
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) 1-77 Compressor Start Min Speed [RPM] 14-11 Line Voltage at Line Fault
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip 14-21 Automatic Restart Time
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) 1-86 Compressor Min. Speed for Trip [RPM] 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) 3-82 Starting Ramp Up Time 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) 4-10 Motor Speed Direction 28-30 Crankcase Heating Control
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] 28-31 Heating DC Current
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] 28-40 Reverse Protection Control
1-39 Motor Poles 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode 28-41 DC Brake Current
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM 4-18 Current Limit 28-42 DC Braking Time
1-44 d-axis Inductance (Ld) 200% INOM 4-19 Max Output Frequency 28-43 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]
Table 6.1 Compressor Related Parameters

6.2 Par. Group 0 - Operation and Display 0-10 Active Set-up

Option: Function:
6.2.1 0-0* Basic Settings
[0] Factory setup Cannot be changed. It contains the Danfoss
data set, and can be used as a data source
0-01 Language when returning the other set-ups to a known
Option: Function: state.
[0] English [1] Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the four
[1] Deutsch separate parameter set-ups within which all
[2] Francais parameters can be programmed.
[3] Dansk
[2] Set-up 2
[4] Spanish
[3] Set-up 3
[5] Italiano
[4] Set-up 4
6 6 [10]
[28]
Chinese
Bras.port
[9] Multi Set-up Remote selection of set-ups using digital
inputs and the serial communication port. This
[39] Korean
set-up uses the settings from 0-12 This Set-up
[42] Trad.Chinese
Linked to. Stop the frequency converter before
[49] Russian making changes to open- and closed loop
functions
0-02 Motor Speed Unit
Option: Function: Use 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up to one or all other
Select display of motor speed parameters (i.e. set-ups. Stop the frequency converter before switching
references, feedbacks and limits) in terms of shaft between set-ups where parameters marked ‘not
speed (RPM) or output frequency to the motor (Hz). changeable during operation’ have different values. To
[0] RPM avoid conflicting settings of the same parameter within
[1] Hz
two different set-ups, link the set-ups together using
0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Parameters which are ‘not
NOTICE! changeable during operation’ are marked FALSE in the
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is parameter lists in 6.16 Parameter Lists.
running.
0-11 Edit Set-up
Option: Function:
0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand)
Select the set-up to be edited (i.e.
Option: Function: programmed) during operation; either the
Selects the operating mode upon active set-up or one of the inactive set-ups.
reconnection of the frequency converter to
[0] Factory setup Cannot be edited but it is useful as a data
mains voltage after power down in Hand
source to return the other set-ups to a known
(local) operation mode.
state.
[0] Resume Restarts the frequency converter, maintaining
[1] Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited freely
the same and the same start/stop settings
during operation, independently of the active
(applied by [Hand On/Off]) as before the
set-up.
frequency converter was powered down.
[2] Set-up 2
[1] Forced stop, Restarts the frequency converter with a saved
[3] Set-up 3
ref=old local reference, after mains voltage reappears
[4] Set-up 4
and after pressing [Hand On].
[9] Active Set-up Can also be edited during operation. Edit the
[2] Forced stop, Resets the local reference to 0 upon restarting chosen set-up from a range of sources: LCP,
ref=0 the frequency converter. FC RS-485, FC USB or up to five fieldbus sites.
0-10 Active Set-up

Option: Function:
Select the set-up to control the frequency
converter functions.

0-12 This Set-up Linked to

Option: Function:
130BP075.10
Figure 6.2 Set-up 1
OR
2. While still in Set-up 1, copy Set-up 1 to Set-up

2. Then set 0-12 This Set-up Linked to to [2] Set-up 6 6
2. This will start the linking process.
130BP076.10
Figure 6.3 Set-up 2
Figure 6.1 Edit Set-up After the link is complete, 0-13 Readout: Linked
Set-ups will read {1,2} to indicate that all ‘not
changeable during operation’ parameters are
0-12 This Set-up Linked to now the same in Set-up 1 and Set-up 2. If there
are changes to a ‘not changeable during
Option: Function:
operation’ parameter, e.g. 1-30 Stator Resistance
To enable conflict-free changes from one set-up
(Rs), in Set-up 2, they will also be changed
to another during operation, link set-ups
automatically in Set-up 1. A switch between Set-
containing parameters which are not changeable
up 1 and Set-up 2 during operation is now
during operation. The link will ensure synchro-
possible.
nizing of the ‘not changeable during operation’
parameter values when moving from one set-up [0] Not linked
to another during operation. ‘Not changeable [1] Set-up 1
during operation’ parameters can be identified by [2] Set-up 2
the label FALSE in the parameter lists in [3] Set-up 3
6.16 Parameter Lists. [4] Set-up 4
0-12 This Set-up Linked to is used by Multi set-up
in 0-10 Active Set-up. Multi set-up is used to move
from one set-up to another during operation (i.e.
while the motor is running).
Example:
Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Set-up
2 whilst the motor is running. Program in Set-up
1 first, then ensure that Set-up 1 and Set-up 2
are synchronized (or ‘linked’). synchronization can
be performed in two ways:
1. Change the edit set-up to [2] Set-up 2 in
0-11 Edit Set-up and set 0-12 This Set-up Linked to
to [1] Set-up 1. This will start the linking (synchro-
nizing) process.

0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Array [5] Option: Function:
Range: Function: [1508] Number of Starts
0* [0 - 255 ] View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of [1509] Number of Auto Resets
0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter has one [1600] Control Word
index for each parameter set-up. The parameter [1601] Reference [Unit]
value displayed for each index represents which [1602] Reference %
set-ups are linked to that parameter set-up. [1603] Status Word
[1605] Main Actual Value [%]
Index LCP value
[1609] Custom Readout
0 {0}
[1610] Power [kW]
1 {1,2}
[1611] Power [hp]
6 6
2 {1,2}
[1612] Motor Voltage
3 {3}
[1613] Frequency
4 {4}
[1614] Motor current
Table 6.3 Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are [1615] Frequency [%]
linked [1616] Torque [Nm]
[1617] Speed [RPM]
[1618] Motor Thermal
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel
[1619] KTY sensor temperature
Range: Function: [1620] Motor Angle
0* [-2147483648 - View the setting of 0-11 Edit Set-up for [1622] Torque [%]
2147483647 ] each of the four different communication [1630] DC Link Voltage
channels. When the number is displayed in [1632] Brake Energy /s
hex, as it is in the LCP, each number [1633] Brake Energy /2 min
represents one channel.
[1634] Heatsink Temp.
Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number;
[1635] Inverter Thermal
‘F’ means factory setting; and ‘A’ means
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current
active set-up. The channels are, from right
[1637] Inv. Max. Current
to left: LCP, FC-bus, USB, HPFB1-5.
[1638] SL Controller State
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means
[1639] Control Card Temp.
that the FC bus selected Set-up 2 in
0-11 Edit Set-up, the LCP selected Set-up 1 [1650] External Reference
and all others used the active set-up. [1651] Pulse Reference
[1652] Feedback[Unit]
[1653] Digi Pot Reference
6.2.2 0-2* LCP Display [1654] Feedback 1 [Unit]
[1655] Feedback 2 [Unit]
Define the display in the Graphical Logic Control Panel. [1660] Digital Input
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small [1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting
Option: Function: [1662] Analog Input 53

[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting
Select a variable for
display in line 1, left [1664] Analog Input 54
position. [1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[1666] Digital Output [bin]
[0] None
[1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[953] Profibus Warning Word
[1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
[1005] Readout Transmit Error Counter
[1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[1006] Readout Receive Error Counter
[1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
[1007] Readout Bus Off Counter
[1671] Relay Output [bin]
[1013] Warning Parameter
[1672] Counter A
[1501] Running Hours
[1673] Counter B
[1502] kWh Counter

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-24 Display Line 3 Large

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1 Options are the same as in
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
[1684] Comm. Option STW [1662] * Analog Input 53
[1685] FC Port CTW 1
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout
[1686] FC Port REF 1
[1690] Alarm Word
Option: Function:
[1691] Alarm Word 2 It is possible to program a value to be
[1692] Warning Word shown in the display of the LCP. The value
will have a linear, squared or cubed relation
[1693] Warning Word 2
to speed. This relation will depend on the
[1694] Ext. Status Word
6 6
unit selected (see ). The actual calculated
[2580] Cascade Status
value can be read in 16-09 Custom Readout,
[2581] Compressor Status
and/or shown in the display be selecting
[2587] Inverse Interlock
[16-09] Custom Readout in 0-20 Display Line
[2827] Discharge Temperature 1.1 Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
[9913] Idle time
[0] None
[9914] Paramdb requests in queue
[1] %
[9917] tCon1 time
[5] PPM
[9918] tCon2 time
[10] min
[9919] Time Optimize Measure
[11] RPM
0-25 My Personal Menu [12] PULSE/s
Range: Function: [20] liter / sec.
Size [0 - Define up to 20 parameters to include in [21] liter / min
related* 9999 ] the Q1 Personal Menu, accessible via the [22] liter / hr.
[Quick Menu] key on the LCP. The [23] m³ / sec.
parameters will be displayed in the Q1 [24] m³/min
Personal Menu in the order they are [25] m³ / hr.
programmed into this array parameter. [30] kg / sec.
Delete parameters by setting the value [31] kg/min
to « 0000 ». [32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small [34] ton / hr.
Option: Function: [40] m / sec.
Options are the same as in [41] m/min
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small [45] m
[1614] * Motor Current [A] [60] °C
[70] mbar
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small
[71] bar
Option: Function:
[72] Pa
Options are the same as in 0-20 Display
[73] kPa
Line 1.1 Small.
[74] m WG
[1610] * Power [kW]
[80] kW
0-23 Display Line 2 Large [120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
Option: Function:
[122] gal/min
Options are the same as in 0-20 Display
[123] gal / hr.
Line 1.1 Small.
[124] CFM
[1613] * Frequency [Hz]
[125] ft³/s
[126] ft³/min
[127] ft³/h

0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
[130] lbs / sec. [1] Enabled Prevents unauthorised start in Hand mode.
[131] lbs / min.
[2] Password
[132] lbs / hr.
[140] ft/s 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP
[141] ft/min Option: Function:
[145] ft Options are the same as in 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
[160] °F
[170] psi
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP
[171] lb/in² Option: Function:
[172] in. wtr. gage Options are the same as in 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
6 6 [173] ft WG
[180] HP
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP
Option: Function:
0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout Options are the same as in 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
Range: Function:
0 CustomRea- [ -999999.99 - This parameter sets the 6.2.4 0-5* Copy/Save
doutUnit* par. 0-32 min. value of the custom
CustomRea- defined readout (occurs at Copy parameter settings between set-ups and to/from the
doutUnit] zero speed). Only possible LCP.
to set different from 0 is
when selecting a linear unit 0-50 LCP Copy
in 0-30 Unit for User-defined Option: Function:
Readout. For Quadratic and [0] * No copy
Cubic units the minimum [1] All to LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from
value will be 0. the frequency converter memory to the
LCP memory.
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value [2] All from LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups from
Range: Function: the LCP memory to the frequency
100 CustomRea- [ par. 0-31 - This parameter sets the max converter memory.
doutUnit* 999999.99 value to be shown when [3] Size indep. from Copies only the parameters that are
CustomRea- the speed of the motor has LCP independent of the motor size.
doutUnit] reached the set value for
0-51 Set-up Copy
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
[RPM] or 4-14 Motor Speed Option: Function:
High Limit [Hz] (depends on [0] No copy
setting in 0-02 Motor Speed [1] Copy to set-up 1 Copies all parameters in the present edit
Unit). set-up (defined in par. 0-11 Edit Set-up) to
Set-up 1. Likewise, select the option
corresponding to the other set-up(s).
6.2.3 0-4* LCP Keypad [2] Copy to set-up 2
[3] Copy to set-up 3
Enable and disable individual keys on the LCP keypad.
[4] Copy to set-up 4
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [9] Copy to all Copies the parameters in the present set-
Option: Function: up over to each of the set-ups 1 to 4.
If 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP is included in the

Quick Menu, then define the password in
0-65 Quick Menu Password.
[0] Disabled Prevents accidental start of the frequency

converter in Hand mode.

6.2.5 0-6* Password
Define password access to menus.

0-60 Main Menu Password
Option: Function:
[Size related] * Define the password for access to the Main
Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If 0-61 Access to
Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0] Full access,
this parameter will be ignored.
0-60 Main Menu Password

Range: Function:
100 * [0 - 999 ]
6 6
0-65 Quick Menu Password
Option: Function:
Define the password for access to the Quick Menu via
the [Quick Menu] key. If 0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o
Password is set to [0] Full access, this parameter will be
ignored.
0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password

Option: Function:
NOTICE!
If 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password
is set to [0] Full access, this parameter will
be ignored.
[ 0] * Full access Disables the password defined in 0-65 Quick
Menu Password.
[1] Read only Prevents unauthorized editing of Quick Menu
parameters.
[2] No access Prevents unauthorized viewing and editing of
Quick Menu parameters.

6.3 Par. Group 1 - Load and Motor

6.3.1 1-0* General Settings
Define whether the frequency converter operates in speed

mode or torque mode; and whether the internal PID
control should be active or not. All parameters from
1-01 Motor Control Principle (included) to 1-81 Min Speed for
Function at Stop [RPM] (included) are read only. Only
1-13 Compressor Selection remains accessible for
compressor selection.
1-00 Configuration Mode
6 6 Option: Function:
NOTICE!
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
Select the application control principle to be
used when a Remote Reference (via analog
input) is active. A Remote Reference can only
be active when 3-13 Reference Site is set to [0]
or [1].
[0] * Speed Enables speed control (without feedback signal
open loop from motor) to the input signal over the
compressor speed range.
[3] Process Enables the use of process control in the
frequency converter. The process control
parameters are set in parameter groups 7-2*
Process PID Feedback and 7-3* Process PID
Control.
1-13 Compressor Selection

Range: Function:
The default setting of most of the parameters
in the frequency converter (e.g. motor data,
limits, ramps etc.) depends upon the
compressor and system refrigerant selected for
the frequency converter.
The frequency converter selects the default
compressor based upon the power size and
voltage range for the frequency converter.
Under normal circumstances this should not
be changed. During test/repair situations a
different compressor can be selected – or if
the system is not using the default refrigerant.
NOTICE!
If the compressor selection is changed,
then all dependent parameters reset to
default and any user settings will be lost.
Size [] Select the compressor/refrigerant combination
dependent. for the system.

6.4 Par. Group 3 - Reference/Ramps 3-10 Preset Reference
6.4.1 3-0* Reference Limits Array [8]
Parameters for reference handling, definition of limitations, 0.00%* [-100.00 Must remain 0 for Open Loop Control.
and configuration of the reaction of the frequency - 100.00 The preset reference is stated as a percentage
converter to changes. %] of the value RefMAX (3-03 Maximum Reference)
or as a percentage of the other external
3-00 Reference Range references. If a RefMIN 0 (3-02 Minimum
Option: Function: Reference) is programmed, the preset
Select the range of the reference signal and reference is calculated as a percentage of the
the feedback signal. Signal values can be full reference range, i.e. on the basis of the
positive only, or positive and negative. The difference between RefMAX and RefMIN.
minimum limit may have a negative value,
unless [1] Speed closed loop control is selected
Afterwards, the value is added to RefMIN.
When using preset references, select [16]
6 6
in 1-00 Configuration Mode. Preset ref. bit 0, [17] Preset ref. bit 1 or [18]
[0] * Min. - Max For positive values only Preset ref. bit 2 for the corresponding digital
[1] -Max - For both positive and negative values inputs in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
+Max
3-12 Catch up/slow-down value
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0 %* [0 - Enter a percentage (relative) value to be either
Select the unit to be used in Process PID Control 100 %] added to or deducted from the actual reference
references and feedbacks. for Catch up or Slow down respectively. If Catch
[0] None up is selected via one of the digital inputs
[71] * bar (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
[60] °C Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
added to the total reference. If Slow down is
[160] °F
selected via one of the digital inputs
[170] psi
(5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
3-02 Minimum Reference Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
Option: Function: deducted from the total reference. Obtain
extended functionality with the DigiPot function.
Enter the minimum reference. The minimum reference
See parameter group 3-9* Digital Potentiometer.
is the lowest value obtainable by summing all
references. Minimum reference is active only when
3-13 Reference Site
3-00 Reference Range is set to [0] Min.- Max..
Option: Function:
The minimum reference unit matches:
Select which reference site to activate.
• The choice of configuration in 1-00 Configu-
[0] Linked to Use the local reference when in Hand mode;
ration Mode: for [1] Speed closed loop.
Hand / Auto or the remote reference when in Auto mode
• The unit selected in 3-01 Reference/Feedback
[1] Remote Use the remote reference in both Hand
Unit.
mode and Auto mode
[2] Local Use the local reference in both Hand mode
and Auto mode
3-03 Maximum Reference
Option: Function: 3-14 Preset Relative Reference
Enter the maximum reference. Range: Function:
0.00%* [-100.00 - Define a fixed value (in %) to be added to
100.00 %] the variable value (defined in 3-18 Relative
Scaling Reference Source). The sum of the
fixed and variable values is multiplied with
the actual reference. This product is then
added to the actual reference (X+X*Y/100)
to give the resultant actual reference.

3-15 Reference Resource 1 3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource

NOTICE! Select a variable value to be added to the
This parameter cannot be adjusted fixed value (defined in 3-14 Preset Relative
while the motor is running. Reference). The sum of the fixed and variable
values is multiplied with the actual reference.
Select the reference input to be used
This product is then added to the actual
for the first reference signal.
reference (X+X*Y/100) to give the resultant
3-15 Reference Resource 1,
actual reference
3-16 Reference Resource 2 and
Same options as 3-15 Reference Resource 1.
3-17 Reference Resource 3 define up to
[0] * No function
three different reference signals. The
sum of these reference signals defines 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]
6 6 [0] No function
the actual reference.
Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - par. Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG,
[1] * Analog input 53
related* 4-13 RPM] which is a fixed output speed. The
[2] Analog input 54
frequency converter runs at this speed
[7] Frequency input 29
when the jog function is activated. The
[8] Frequency input 33 maximum limit is defined in 4-13 Motor
[11] Local bus reference Speed High Limit [RPM].
[20] Digital pot.meter See also 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
3-16 Reference Resource 2

3-40 Ramp 1 Type
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
NOTICE! Select the ramp type, depending on requirements
This parameter cannot be adjusted while for acceleration/deceleration. A linear ramp will give
the motor is running. constant acceleration during ramping.
Select the reference input to be used for the [0] * Linear
second reference signal. Parameters
3-15 Reference Resource 1, 3-16 Reference 3-41 Ramp Up Time Running (sec)
Resource 2 and 3-17 Reference Resource 3 Range: Function:
define up to three different reference signals. 5 s min.* [Comp dependent] Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the
The sum of these reference signals defines the acceleration time to reach the
actual reference. system required motor speed.
Same options as 3-15 Reference Resource 1.
[0] * No
3-42 Ramp-down Time Running (sec)
function Range: Function:
0.30 s* [0.01 - 3,600.00 s] Enter the ramp-down time, i.e., the
3-17 Reference Resource 3
deceleration time needed to reach
Option: Function: minimum compressor motor speed.
NOTICE! 3-50 Ramp 2 Type
the motor is running. Option: Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
Select the reference input to be used for the
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
third reference signal. 3-15 Reference Resource
linear ramp will give constant acceleration
1, 3-16 Reference Resource 2 and 3-17 Reference
during ramping. An S-ramp will give non-linear
Resource 3 define up to three different
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
reference signals. The sum of these reference
application.
signals defines the actual reference.
Same options as 3-15 Reference Resource 1. [0] Linear
[0] * No [1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk
function Const Jerk

3-50 Ramp 2 Type 3-60 Ramp 3 Type

[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in 3-51 Ramp 2 [2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in 3-61 Ramp 3
Const Time Ramp-up Time and 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Const Time Ramp-up Time and 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp-down
Time Time
NOTICE! NOTICE!
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference during If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference during
ramping is changed the ramp time may be prolonged in ramping is changed the ramp time may be prolonged in
order to realize a jerk free movement which may result in order to realize a jerk free movement which may result in
a longer start or stop time. a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary. initiators may be necessary.
6 6
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp-up Time
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the
related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 RPM to the
s] ns. Choose a ramp-up time such that the rated motor speed ns. Choose a ramp-up
output current does not exceed the current time such that the output current does
limit in 4-18 Current Limit during ramping. not exceed the current limit in
The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in 4-18 Current Limit during ramping. The
speed mode. See ramp-down time in value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time. speed mode. See ramp-down time in
tacc s x ns RPM 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp-down Time.
Par . 3 − 51 =
ref RPM
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp-down Time
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the related* - 3600 deceleration time from the rated motor speed
related* - 3600 deceleration time from the rated motor speed s] ns to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such
s] ns to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that no over-voltage arises in the inverter due
that no over-voltage arises in the inverter due to regenerative operation of the motor, and
to regenerative operation of the motor, and such that the generated current does not
such that the generated current does not exceed the current limit set in 4-18 Current
exceed the current limit set in 4-18 Current Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in
Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-up time in 3-61 Ramp
speed mode. See ramp-up time in 3-51 Ramp 3 Ramp-up Time.
2 Ramp-up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
tdec s x ns RPM Par . 3 − 62 =
ref RPM
Par . 3 − 52 =
ref RPM
3-70 Ramp 4 Type
3-60 Ramp 3 Type
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
Select the ramp type, depending on requirements for acceleration and deceleration.
requirements for acceleration and deceleration. A linear ramp will give constant acceleration
A linear ramp will give constant acceleration during ramping. An S-ramp will give non-linear
during ramping. An S-ramp will give non-linear acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the application
application.
[0] Linear
[0] Linear
[1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
[1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk. Const Jerk
Const Jerk

3-70 Ramp 4 Type 3-80 Jog Ramp Time

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in 3-71 Ramp 4 communication port. When jog state is
Const Time Ramp-up Time and 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp-down disabled then the normal ramping times are
Time. valid.
NOTICE!
130BA070.10
RPM
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference during

ramping is changed the ramp time may be prolonged in P 4-13 RPM
high limit
order to realize a jerk free movement which may result in
P 1-25
a longer start or stop time. Motor speed
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching P 3-19
Jog speed
initiators may be necessary.
6 6 P 4-11 RPM
low limit
t jog t jog Time
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp-up Time P 3-80 P 3-80
Ramp up Ramp down
Range: Function: (acc) (dec)
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration
Figure 6.4 Jog Ramp Time
related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed
s] ns. Choose a ramp-up time such that the
output current does not exceed the current
tjog s x ns RPM
limit in 4-18 Current Limit during ramping. Par . 3 − 80 =
Δ jog speed ( par . 3 − 19) RPM
The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time
speed mode. See ramp-down time in
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp-down Time.
Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - Enter the quick–stop ramp-down time, i.e.
tacc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 71 =
ref RPM
related* 3600 s] the deceleration time from the synchronous
motor speed to 0 RPM. Ensure that no
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp-down Time resultant over-voltage will arise in the
Range: Function: inverter due to regenerative operation of
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the the motor required to achieve the given
related* - 3600 deceleration time from the rated motor speed ramp-down time. Ensure also that the
s] ns to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such generated current required to achieve the
that no over-voltage arises in the inverter due given ramp-down time does not exceed the
to regenerative operation of the motor, and current limit (set in 4-18 Current Limit).
such that the generated current does not Quick-stop is activated by means of a signal
exceed the current limit set in 4-18 Current on a selected digital input, or via the serial
Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in communication port.
speed mode. See ramp-up time in 3-71 Ramp
130BA069.10
RPM
4 Ramp-up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 − 72 =
ref RPM P 4-13 RPM
high limit
3-80 Jog Ramp Time Reference

P 1-25
Range: Function: Motor speed
Size [0.01 - Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the P 4-11 RPM
related* 3600 s] acceleration/deceleration time between 0 low limit
RPM and the rated motor frequency ns.

Ensure that the resultant output current Time
P 3-81
Qramp
required for the given jog ramp time does
not exceed the current limit in 4-18 Current Qstop
Limit. The jog ramp time starts upon
Figure 6.5 Quick Stop Ramp Time
activation of a jog signal via the LCP, a
selected digital input, or the serial

6.5 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 4-21 Speed Limit Factor SourceOption

Option: Function:
6.5.1 4-1* Motor Limits
[6] Analog input 54
[8] Analog input 54 inv
[10] Analog input X30-11
Define torque, current and speed limits for the motor, and
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
inv
exceeded.
A limit may generate a message on the display. A warning
will always generate a message on the display or on the [16] Analog input X30-12
fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a inv
trip, upon which the frequency converter will stop and
generate an alarm message. 6.5.2 4-5* Adjustable Warnings
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source
Use these parameters to adjust warning limits for current,
6 6
Option: Function:
speed, reference and feedback.
Select an analog input for scaling the
Warnings are shown on the LCP, and can be programmed
settings in 4-16 Torque Limit Motor
to be outputs or to be read out via serial bus in the
Mode and 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Extended Status Word.
Mode from 0% to 100% (or inverse).
The signal levels corresponding to 0%
130BA064.10
and 100% are defined in the analog Imotor
input scaling, e.g. parameter group

6-1* Analog Input 1. This parameter is ILIM ON REF
only active when 1-00 Configuration (P 4-18)
Mode is in Speed Open Loop or Speed IHIGH
Closed Loop. (P 4-51)
[0] No function
IN RANGE
[2] Analog in 53
[4] Analog in 53 inv
ILOW
[6] Analog in 54 (P 4-50)
[8] Analog in 54 inv
nmotor [RPM]
[10] Analog in X30-11
[12] Analog in X30-11 nMIN nLOW REF nHIGH nMAX
(P 4-11) (P 4-52) (P 4-53) (P 4-13)
inv
Figure 6.6 Adjustable Warnings
inv
4-50 Warning Current Low
4-21 Speed Limit Factor SourceOption
Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0 A* [ 0 - par. Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current
Select an analog input for scaling 4-51 A] falls below this limit, the display reads Current
the settings in 4-19 Max Output Low. The signal outputs can be programmed
Frequency from 0% to 100% (or vice to produce a status signal on terminal 27 or
versa). The signal levels 29 and on relay output 01 or 02. Refer to
corresponding to 0% and 100% are Figure 6.6.
defined in the analog input scaling,
e.g. parameter group 6-1* Analog 4-51 Warning Current High
Input 1. This parameter is only active
Range: Function:
when 1-00 Configuration Mode is in
Size [ par. 4-50 Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor
Torque Mode.
related* - par. 16-37 current exceeds this limit, the display
[0] * No function
A] reads Current High. The signal outputs
[2] Analog input 53
can be programmed to produce a
[4] Analog input 53 inv

4-51 Warning Current High 4-56 Warning Feedback Low

status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and -999999.999 [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower
on relay output 01 or 02. ReferenceFeed- par. 4-57 feedback limit. When the
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- feedback falls below this
4-52 Warning Speed Low backUnit] limit, the display reads
Range: Function: Feedb Low. The signal
outputs can be
Size [ 0 - par. Enter the nLOW value. When the motor
programmed to produce
related* 4-53 RPM] speed exceeds this limit, the display
a status signal on
reads Speed Low. The signal outputs
terminal 27 or 29 and
can be programmed to produce a
on relay output 01 or
status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and
02.
6 6 on relay output 01 or 02.
4-53 Warning Speed High 4-57 Warning Feedback High

999999.999 [ par. 4-56 - Enter the upper
Size [ par. Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor
ReferenceFeed- 999999.999 feedback limit. When
related* 4-52 - speed exceeds this limit, the display
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- the feedback exceeds
60000 reads Speed High. The signal outputs can
backUnit] this limit, the display
RPM] be programmed to produce a status
reads Feedb High. The
signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay
signal outputs can be
output 01 or 02. Program the upper
programmed to produce
signal limit of the motor speed, nHIGH,
a status signal on
within the normal working range of the
terminal 27 or 29 and
on relay output 01 or
02.
4-54 Warning Reference Low
Range: Function: 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function
-999999.999 * [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower reference limit.
Displays alarm 30, 31 or 32 in the event of a missing motor
par. 4-55 ] When the actual reference falls
phase. It is strongly recommended to enable to avoid motor
below this limit, the display
damage.
indicates RefLOW. The signal
outputs can be programmed to
Option: Function:
produce a status signal on NOTICE!
terminal 27 or 29 and on relay This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
output 01 or 02. motor is running.
4-55 Warning Reference High [0] Off No alarm is displayed if a missing motor phase occurs.
Range: Function:
[1] On
999999.999 * [ par. 4-54 - Enter the upper reference limit.
999999.999 ] When the actual reference
exceeds this limit, the display
6.5.3 4-6* Speed Bypass
reads Ref High. The signal
outputs can be programmed to Some systems call for avoiding certain output frequencies
produce a status signal on or speeds, due to resonance problems in the system. A
terminal 27 or 29 and on relay maximum of four frequency or speed ranges can be
output 01 or 02. avoided.

4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Some systems call for avoiding
RPM] certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the
speeds to be avoided.
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding 6 6
4-14 Hz] certain output speeds due to
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
to be avoided.
4-62 Bypass Speed to [RPM]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Some systems call for avoiding
RPM] certain output speeds due to
Enter the upper limits of the
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding
4-14 Hz] certain output speeds due to
Enter the upper limits of the

6.6 Par. Group 5 - Digital In/Out 5-00 Digital In/Out Mode

Option: Function:
6.6.1 5-** Digital In/Out
[1] NPN
Parameter group for configuring the digital input and 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
output. Option: Function:
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.
6.6.2 5-0* Digital In/Out Mode [1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.
5-00 Digital In/Out Mode NOTICE!

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is
Option: Function:
running.
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are
6 6 pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or NPN

systems. 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses. Option: Function:
Similar to Terminal 27
6.6.3 5-1* Digital Inputs
Parameters for configuring the input functions for the input terminals.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to the
following functions:
Digital input function Select Terminal

No operation [0] All *term 19, 29, 33
Reset [1] All *term 32
Coast inverse [2] All
Coast and reset inverse [3] All
Quick stop inverse [4] All
DC-brake inverse [5] All
Stop inverse [6] All *term 27
Start [8] All *term 18
Latched start [9] All
Reversing [10] All
Start reversing [11] All
Enable start forward [12] All
Enable start reverse [13] All
Jog [14] All
Preset reference on [15] All
Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Freeze reference [19] All
Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
Speed down [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
Catch up [28] All
Slow down [29] All
Pulse input [32] 29, 33

Digital input function Select Terminal

Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Ramp bit 1 [35] All
Mains failure inverse [36] All
Day/night control [39] All
DigiPot Increase [55] All
DigiPot Decrease [56] All
DigiPot Clear [57] All
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
Reset Counter A [62] All
Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
Counter B (down)
Reset Counter B
[64]
[65]
29, 33
All 6 6
Lead pump start [120] All
Lead pump alternation [121] All
Comp. 1 Interlock [130] All
Comp. 1 Inv. interlock [139] All
Table 6.4 Overview of Digital Inputs
Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter.
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions: [6] Stop inverse Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop
function when the selected terminal goes
[0] No No reaction to signals transmitted to the from logical level ‘1’ to ‘0’. The stop is
operation terminal. performed according to the selected ramp
[1] Reset Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/ time (3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time,
ALARM. Not all alarms can be reset. 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time, 3-62 Ramp 3
[2] Coast (Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, Ramp down Time, 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down
inverse inverted input (NC). The frequency converter Time).
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic ‘0’ ⇒ NOTICE!
coasting stop. When the frequency converter is at the
[3] Coast and Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC). torque limit and has received a stop
reset inverse Leaves motor in free mode and resets command, it may not stop by itself. To
frequency converter. Logic ‘0’ ⇒ coasting stop ensure that the frequency converter
and reset. stops, configure a digital output to [27]
[4] Quick stop Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in Torque limit & stop and connect this
inverse accordance with quick-stop ramp time set in digital output to a digital input that is
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When motor configured as coast.
stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic ‘0’ ⇒ [8] Start (Default Digital input 18): Select start for a
Quick-stop. start/stop command. Logic ‘1’ = start, logic ‘0’
[5] DC-brake Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops = stop.
inverse motor by energizing it with a DC current for [9] Latched The motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min.
a certain time period. See 2-01 DC Brake start 2 ms. The motor stops when Stop inverse is
Current to 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]. activated.
The function is only active when the value in [10] Reversing (Default Digital input 19). Change the
2-02 DC Braking Time is different from 0. direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic
Logic ’0’ ⇒ DC braking.

‘1’ to reverse. The reversing signal only NOTICE!

changes the direction of rotation. It does not When Freeze output is active, the frequency
activate the start function. Select both converter cannot be stopped via a low [8]
directions in 4-10 Motor Speed Direction. The start signal. Stop the frequency converter via
function is not active in process closed loop. a terminal programmed for [2] Coasting
[11] Start Used for start/stop and for reversing on the inverse or [3] Coast and reset, inverse.
reversing same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at
[21] Speed Select Speed up and Speed down if digital control
the same time.
up of the up/down speed is desired (motor potenti-
[12] Enable start Rotates motor shaft clockwise at start.
ometer). Activate this function by selecting either
forward
Freeze reference or Freeze output. When Speed
[13] Enable start Rotates motor shaft counterclockwise at start.
up/ down is activated for less than 400 ms the
reverse
resulting reference will be increased/ decreased by
[14] Jog (Default Digital input 29): Use to activate jog 0.1 %. If Speed up/ down is activated for more
6 6 [15] Preset
speed. See 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
Shifts between external reference and preset
than 400 ms the resulting reference will follow the
setting in ramping up/ down parameter 3-x1/ 3-x2.
reference on reference. It is assumed that [1] External/preset
has been selected in 3-04 Reference Function. Shut down Catch up
Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1' Unchanged speed 0 0
= one of the eight preset references is active. Reduced by %-value 1 0
[16] Preset ref bit Preset ref. bit 0,1, and 2 enables a choice Increased by %-value 0 1
0 between one of the eight preset references Reduced by %-value 1 1
according to Table 6.5.
[17] Preset ref bit Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16]. Table 6.6 Digital Speed Control
1
[18] Preset ref bit Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16]. [22] Speed down Same as Speed up [21].
2 [23] Set-up select Select Set-up select bit 0 or Select Set-up
bit 0 select bit 1 to select one of the 4 set-ups.
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0 Set 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0 [24] Set-up select (Default Digital input 32): Same as [23] Set-
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1 bit 1 up select bit 0.
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0 [28] Catch up Increases or reduces reference value set in
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0 [29] Slow down [28] Same as Catch up.
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1 [30] Counter input Precise stop function in 1-83 Precise Stop
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0 Function acts as Counter stop or speed
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1 compensated counter stop with or without
reset. The counter value must be set in
Table 6.5 Reference Bits 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.
[32] Pulse input Use pulse sequence as either reference or
[19] Freeze Freezes the actual reference, which is now the feedback. Scaling is done in parameter
ref point of enable/condition for Speed up and Speed group 5-5* Pulse Input.
down to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the [34] Ramp bit 0 Enables a choice between one of the 4
speed change always follows ramp 2 (3-51 Ramp 2 ramps available, according to Table 6.7.
Ramp Up Time and 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) [35] Ramp bit 1 Same as [34] Ramp bit 0.
in the range 0 - 3-03 Maximum Reference.
[20] Freeze Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is Preset ramp bit 1 0
output now the point of enable/condition for Speed up Ramp 1 0 0
and Speed down to be used. If Speed up/down is Ramp 2 0 1
used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 Ramp 3 1 0
(3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp 4 1 1
Ramp Down Time) in the range 0 to 1-23 Motor
Frequency. Table 6.7 Ramp Bits

[36] Mains failure Activates 14-10 Mains Failure. Mains 5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input
inverse failure inverse is active in the Logic .0.
Option: Function:
situation.
[10] * Reversing Functions are described under parameter group
[39] Day/Night Reduce the max. frequency with the
5-1* Digital Inputs
Control setting in 28-74 Night Speed Drop [RPM].
[41] Latched Precise Sends a latched stop signal when the 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Stop inverse precise stop function is activated in Option: Function:
1-83 Precise Stop Function. The Latched
[2] * Coast inverse Functions are described under parameter
Precise stop inverse function is available
group 5-1* Digital Inputs
for terminals 18 or 19.
[55] DigiPot Increase INCREASE signal to the Digital Potenti- 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
ometer function described in parameter Option: Function:
group 3-9* Digital Potmeter.
Select the function from the available
[56] DigiPot Decrease DECREASE signal to the Digital Potenti-
ometer function described in parameter
digital input range and the additional 6 6
options [60], [61], [63] and [64].
group 3-9* Digital Potmeter Counters are used in Smart Logic
[57] DigiPot Clear Clears the Digital Potentiometer Control functions.
reference described in parameter group [14] * Jog
3-9* Digital Potmeter
[60] Counter A (up)
[60] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for
[61] Counter A (down)
increment counting in the SLC counter.
[63] Counter B (up)
[61] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for
[64] Counter B (down)
decrement counting in the SLC counter.
[62] Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A. 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input
[63] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for Option: Function:
increment counting in the SLC counter.
Select the function from the available digital
[64] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for input range.
decrement counting in the SLC counter.
No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital Inputs
[65] Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.
[70] Mech. Brake Brake feedback for hoisting applications 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input
Feedback Option: Function:
[71] Mech. Brake Inverted brake feedback for hoisting Select the function from the available digital
Feedback inv. applications input range and the additional options [60],
[80] PTC Card 1 All Digital Inputs can be set to [80] PTC [61], [63] and [64]. Counters are used in
Card 1. However, only one Digital Input Smart Logic Control functions.
must be set to this choice. [0] * No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital
[121] Lead Pump Inputs
Alternation
[130] Compressor Use with cascade controller. Logic 1 will 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop
Interlock stop the fixed speed compressor and Option: Function:
give a warning [1] Safe Stop Alarm
[131] Compressor Use with cascade controller. Logic 1 will [3] Safe Stop Warning
Interlock stop the fixed speed compressor and [4] PTC 1 Alarm
give a warning [5] PTC 1 Warning
[132] Compressor Use with cascade controller. Logic 1 will [6] PTC 1 & Relay A
Interlock stop the fixed speed compressor and [7] PTC 1 & Relay W
give a warning
[8] PTC 1 & Relay A/W
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9] PTC 1 & Relay W/A
Option: Function:
[8] * Start Functions are described under parameter group 5-1*
Digital Inputs

6.6.4 5-3* Digital Outputs [13] Below current, The motor current is lower than set in
low 4-50 Warning Current Low.
Parameters for configuring the output functions for the [14] Above current, The motor current is higher than set in
output terminals. The 2 solid-state digital outputs are high 4-51 Warning Current High.
common for terminals 27 and 29. Set the I/O function for [15] Out of speed The output speed is outside the range
terminal 27 in 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O range set in 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
function for terminal 29 in 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. Digital 4-53 Warning Speed High.
outputs appear if 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode or 5-02 Terminal [16] Below speed, The output speed is lower than the
29 Mode are set to output. low setting in 4-52 Warning Speed Low.
[17] Above speed, The output speed is higher than the
NOTICE! high setting in 4-53 Warning Speed High.
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is [18] Out of The feedback is outside the range set in
running. feedback range 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and
6 6 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[19] Below feedback The feedback is below the limit set in
NOTICE! low 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
Only for activating 24 V DC devices − restricted use for
[20] Above The feedback is above the limit set in
relays.
feedback high 4-57 Warning Feedback High .
[21] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the
The digital outputs can be programmed warning temperature exceeds the limit in the
with these functions: motor, the frequency converter, the brake
[0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay resistor, or the thermistor.
outputs [25] Reverse Reversing. Logic ‘1’ = relay activated, 24 V
[1] Control ready The control board receives supply DC when CW rotation of the motor. Logic
voltage. ‘0’ = relay not activated, no signal, when
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for CCW rotation of the motor.
operation and applies a supply signal on [26] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out) via
the control board. the serial communication port.
[3] Drive ready / The frequency converter is ready for [27] Torque limit Use in performing a coasting stop and in
remote control operation and is in Auto On mode. and stop torque limit condition. If the frequency
[4] Stand-by / no The frequency converter is ready for converter has received a stop signal and
warning operation. No start or stop command is is at the torque limit, the signal is Logic
been given (start/disable). There are no ‘0’.
warnings. [28] Brake, no The brake is active and there are no
[5] Running The motor is running. warning warnings.
[6] Running / no The output speed is higher than the [29] Brake ready, no The brake is ready for operation and
warning speed set in 1-81 Min Speed for Function fault there are no faults.
at Stop [RPM]. The motor is running and [30] Brake fault The output is Logic ‘1’ when the brake
there are no warnings. (IGBT) IGBT is short-circuited. Use this function
[7] Run on The motor runs at reference speed. to protect the frequency converter if
reference / no there is a fault on the brake modules.
warning Use the output/relay to cut out the main
[8] Run in range / The motor runs in speed range. voltage from the frequency converter.
no warning [33] Safe Stop Indicates that the safe stop on terminal
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. There are Active 37 is active.
no warnings. [35] External External Interlock function has been
[10] Alarm or An alarm or a warning activates the Interlock activated via one of the digital inputs.
warning output. [40] Out of ref Active when the actual speed is outside
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in 4-16 Torque Limit range the settings in 4-52 Warning Speed Low to
Motor Mode or 1-17 Voltage filter time 4-55 Warning Reference High.
const. has been exceeded. [41] Below Active when the actual speed is below
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range reference low the speed reference setting.
range set in 4-18 Current Limit.

[42] Above Active when the actual speed is above output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
reference high the speed reference setting. low.
[45] Bus Ctrl Control output via bus. The state of the [74] Logic Rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
output is set in 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Logic Rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
Control. The output state is retained in output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
the event of bus time-out. low.
[46] Bus Ctrl 1 if Controls output via bus. The state of the [75] Logic Rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
timeout output is set in 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Logic Rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
Control. In the event of bus time-out the output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
output state is set low (On). low.
[47] Bus Ctrl 0 if Controls output via bus. The state of the [80] SL Digital See 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input
timeout output is set in 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Output A will go high whenever the Smart Logic
Control. In the event of bus time-out the Action [38] Set dig. out. A high is
[55] Pulse output

output state is set low (Off). executed. The input will go low
whenever the Smart Logic Action [32] Set
6 6
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. dig. out. A low is executed.
If Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the [81] SL Digital See 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be Output B will go high whenever the Smart Logic
low. Action [39] Set dig. out. A high is
[61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. executed. The input will go low
If Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the whenever the Smart Logic Action [33] Set
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be dig. out. A low is executed.
low. [82] SL Digital See 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input
[62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. Output C will go high whenever the Smart Logic
If Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the Action [40] Set dig. out. A high is
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be executed. The input will go low
low. whenever the Smart Logic Action [34] Set
[63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. dig. out. A low is executed.
If Comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the [83] SL Digital See 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be Output D will go high whenever the Smart Logic
[64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. executed. The input will go low
If Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the whenever the Smart Logic Action [35] Set
low. [84] SL Digital See 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input
[65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. Output E will go high whenever the Smart Logic
If Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the Action [42] Set dig. out. A high is
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be executed. The input will go low
low. whenever the Smart Logic Action [36] Set
[70] Logic Rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If dig. out. A low is executed.
Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the [85] SL Digital See 13-52 SL Controller Action. The input
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be Output F will go high whenever the Smart Logic
[71] Logic Rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules If executed. The input will go low
Logic Rule 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the whenever the Smart Logic Action [37] Set
low. [122] No alarm The output is high when no alarm is
[72] Logic Rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If present.
Logic Rule 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the [123] Start command The output is high when there is an
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be active active Start command (i.e. via digital
low. input bus connection or [Hand on] or
[73] Logic Rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If [Auto on], and no Stop or Start command
Logic Rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the is active.

[124] Running The output is high when the frequency Wiring diagrams and settings for parameter, see parameter
reverse converter is running counter clockwise group 25-** Cascade Pack Controller or more details.
(the logical product of the status bits
‘running’ AND ‘reverse’). 6.6.5 5-4* Relays (Dry Contacts)
[125] Drive in hand The output is high when the frequency
mode converter is in Hand on mode (as
indicated by the LED light above [Hand
NOTICE!
Relays 7, 8, and 9 are only available if MCB 105 relay card
on].
is installed.
[126] Drive in auto The output is high when the frequency
mode converter is in Hand on mode (as
indicated by the LED light above [Auto NOTICE!
on]. Relay 1 is dedicated to controlling the solenoid valve.
[139] Compressor Use with cascade controller. Logic will
6 6 Inv. Interlock stop the fixed speed compressor and

give a warning.
Parameters for configuring the timing and the output
functions for the relays.
[140] Compressor Use with cascade controller. Logic will
5-40 Function Relay
Inv. Interlock stop the fixed speed compressor and
give a warning. Array [8] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7],
[141] Compressor Use with cascade controller. Logic will Relay 9 [8])
Inv. Interlock stop the fixed speed compressor and
give a warning. [0] No Operation
[195] Bypass Valve The bypass valve control (Digital/Relay [1] Control Ready
Control output in the frequency converter) is [2] Drive Ready
used for compressor systems to unload [3] Drive Ready/Remote
the compressor during start-up by using
[4] Stand-by/No Warning
a bypass valve. After the start command
[5] * Running
is given the bypass valve will be open
[6] Running/No Warning
until the frequency converter reaches
[8] Run on Ref./No Warning
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]). After
[9] Alarm
the limit has been reached the bypass
[10] Alarm or Warning
valve will be closed, allowing the
compressor to operate normally. This [11] At Torque Limit
procedure will not be activated again [12] Out of Current Range
before a new start is initiated and the [13] Below Current, low
frequency converter speed is zero during [14] Above Current, high
the receiving of start signal. 1-71 Start [15] Out of Speed Range
Delay can be used in order to delay the [16] Below Speed, low
motor start. The bypass valve control [17] Above Speed, high
principle: [18] Out of Feedb. Range
Speed [19] Below Feedback, low
130BA251.10
[20] Above Feedback, high

REF
[21] Thermal Warning
Speed
Min [22] Ready, no thermal w
Time
[25] Reverse
ON
OFF [26] Bus OK
Time
ON [27] Torque Limit & Stop
OFF [28] Brake, No Warning
Start Stop Time
[29] Brake Ready, No Fault
Figure 6.7 Bypass Valve Control
[30] Brake Fault (IGBT)
[31] Relay 123
[32] Mech brake ctrl
The below setting options are all related to the Cascade [33] Safe stop active
Controller. [35] External Interlock

[36] Control Word Bit 11 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

[37] Control Word Bit 12 Range: Function:
[40] Out of Ref. Range
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference
[41] Below Reference, low
backUnit* 999999.999 value limit for the motor
[42] Above Ref. high ReferenceFeed- shaft speed [RPM]. This
[45] Bus ctrl backUnit] is also the lowest
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout feedback value, see also
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout 5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./
[60] Comparator 0 Feedb. Value. Set
[61] Comparator 1 terminal 29 to digital
[62] Comparator 2 input (5-02 Terminal 29
[63] Comparator 3 Mode = [0] input
(default) and
[64]
[65]
Comparator 4
Comparator 5 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital 6 6
[70] Logic Rule 0 Input = applicable value).
[71] Logic Rule 1

5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[72] Logic Rule 2
[73] Logic Rule 3 Range: Function:
[74] Logic Rule 4 Size [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference value
[75] Logic Rule 5 related* 999999.999 [RPM] for the motor shaft
[80] SL Digital Output A ReferenceFeed- speed and the high feedback
backUnit] value, see also 5-58 Term. 33
[81] SL Digital Output B
High Ref./Feedb. Value. Select
[82] SL Digital Output C
terminal 29 as a digital input
[83] SL Digital Output D
(5-02 Terminal 29 Mode = [0]
[84] SL Digital Output E
input (default) and
[85] SL Digital Output F
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input =
[120] Local Ref. Active
applicable value).
[121] Remote Ref. Active
[122] No Alarm 5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29
[123] Start Cmd. Active
Range: Function:
[124] Running Reverse
100 ms* [1 - 1000 Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
[125] Drive in Hand Mode
ms] pulse filter dampens oscillations of the
[126] Drive in Auto Mode
feedback signal, which is an advantage if
[195] Bypass Valve Control there is a lot of noise in the system. A
[211] Cascade Compressor 1 high time constant value results in better
[212] Cascade Compressor 2 dampening but also increases the time
[213] Cascade Compressor 3 delay through the filter.
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency limit
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency
Hz] corresponding to the low motor shaft
Hz] corresponding to the low motor shaft
speed (i.e. low reference value) in
speed (i.e. low reference value) in
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Refer to the diagram in this section.
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency

5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency limit
Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft
Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference value [RPM] [0] No operation Select the desired display output for
999999.999 ] for the motor shaft speed. This is also terminal 29.
the low feedback value, see also
[45] Bus ctrl.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[51] MCO controlled
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[100] Output frequency
Range: Function:
[101] Reference
Size related* [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference [102] Feedback
999999.999 value [RPM] for the motor
[103] Motor Current
ReferenceFeedbackUnit] shaft speed. See also
[104] Torque rel to limit
6 6 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./
Feedb. Value.
[105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33
[108] Torque
Range: Function:
[109] Max Out Freq
100 ms* [1 - 1000 Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
ms] low-pass filter reduces the influence on 5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29
and dampens oscillations on the feedback Set the maximum frequency for terminal 29 corresponding to the
signal from the control. output variable set in 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable.
This is an advantage, e.g. if there is a
Range: Function:
great amount on noise in the system.
5000 Hz* [0 - 32000 Hz]
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control
[0] No operation Select the desired display output for 0* [0 - 2147483647 ] This parameter holds the state of the
terminal 27. digital outputs and relays that is
[45] Bus ctrl. controlled by bus.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout A logical '1' indicates that the output is
[51] MCO controlled high or active.
[100] Output frequency A logical '0' indicates that the output is
low or inactive.
[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor current
[104] Torque rel to limit
[105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq
[119] Torque % lim
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27

Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for
Hz] terminal 27, corresponding to the
output variable selected in
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output
Variable.

Bit 0 Digital Output Terminal 27

Bit 1 Digital Output Terminal 29
Bit 2 Digital Output Terminal X 30/6
Bit 3 Digital Output Terminal X 30/7
Bit 4 Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 5 Relay 2 output terminal
Bit 6 Option B Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 9-15 Reserved for future terminals
Bit 16 Option C Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 18
Bit 19
Option C Relay 3 output terminal
Option C Relay 4 output terminal 6 6
Table 6.8 Bus-controlled Digital Outputs and Relays
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable.
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal 29 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable.

6.7 Par. Group 6 - Analog In/Out 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Option: Function:
Parameter group for configuration of the analog input and
[5] Stop and Overruled to stop with subsequent trip
output.
trip
6.7.1 6-0* Analog In/Out Mode

6.7.2 6-1* Analog Input 1
Parameter group for setting up the analog In/Out configu-
ration. Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for
analog input 1 (terminal 53).
The frequency converter is equipped with 2 analog inputs:

Terminal 53 and 54. The analog inputs on the frequency NOTICE!
converter can freely be allocated to either voltage (-10 V to Analog input 53 is preset for usage with “Open Loop”
6 6 +10 V) or current input (0/4 to 20 mA). control on 0-10 V. Terminal 54 is preset for “Process Loop”
control using a pressure sensor AKS with a pressure range
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
of -14 : 174 psi.
Range: Function:
10 s* [1 - Enter the Live Zero Time-out time period. Live 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
99 s] Zero Time-out Time is active for analog inputs, i.e.
Range: Function:
terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or
feedback sources. If the reference signal value 0.00V* [-10.0 - par. This analog input scaling value should
associated with the selected current input falls 6-11] correspond to the minimum reference
below 50% of the value set in 6-10 Terminal 53 value, set in 3-02 Minimum Reference.
Low Voltage, 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, 6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or 6-22 Terminal 54
Range: Function:
Low Current for a time period longer than the time
set in 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time, the function 10.00 V* [6-10 to 10 V] This analog input scaling value should
selected in 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function will be correspond to the maximum reference
activated. value, set in par. 3-03.
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
4.0mA* [0.0 to par. 6-13 This reference signal should
Select the time-out function. The function set
mA] correspond to the minimum
in 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function will be
reference value, set in 3-02 Minimum
activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or
Reference.
54 is below 50% of the value in 6-10 Terminal
53 Low Voltage, 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or 6-22 Terminal Range: Function:
54 Low Current for a time period defined in
20.0mA* [6-12 to 20 mA] This reference signal should
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time. If several time-
correspond to the maximum
outs occur simultaneously, the frequency
reference value, set in 3-02 Minimum
converter prioritizes the time-out functions as
Reference.
follows:
1. 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
2. 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function

Range: Function:
Size related* [Enter the analog input scaling value
[1] Freeze Frozen at the present value
that corresponds to the low voltage/low
Output
current set in 6-10 Terminal 53 Low
[0] * Off Voltage and 6-12 Terminal 53 Low
[1] Freeze Frozen at the present value Current.]
output
[2] Stop Overruled to stop
[3] Jogging Overruled to jog speed
[4] Max. speed Overruled to max. speed

6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value 6-23 Terminal 54 High Current

Size related* [] 20.0mA * [6-12 to 20 mA] This reference signal should
Enter the analog input scaling value that correspond to the maximum output
corresponds to the maximum reference value of the pressure sensor.
feedback value set in 6-11 Terminal 53 High
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb.
Voltage and 6-13 Terminal 53 High Current.
Range: Function:
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp-down Time -1 (bar) [Value] Enter the analog input scaling value that
Range: Function: corresponds to the minimum reference
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the feedback value set in 3-02 Minimum Reference.
related* - 3600 deceleration time from the rated motor speed
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
6 6
s] ns to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such
that no over-voltage arises in the inverter due Range: Function:
to regenerative operation of the motor, and 12 (bar) [Value ] Enter the analog input scaling value that
such that the generated current does not corresponds to the maximum reference
exceed the current limit set in 4-18 Current feedback value set in 3-03 Maximum
Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in Reference.
speed mode. See ramp-up time in 3-71 Ramp
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
4 Ramp-up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
Range: Function:
Par . 3 − 72 =
ref RPM 0.001 s* [0.001 - NOTICE!
10 s] This parameter cannot be adjusted
6.7.3 6-2* Analog Input 2 while the motor is running.
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for Enter the time constant. This is a first-
analog input 2 (terminal 54). order digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
NOTICE! 54. A high time constant value improves

dampening but also increases the time
Analog input 53 is preset for usage with “open loop”
delay through the filter.
control on 0-10 V. Terminal 54 is preset for “Process Loop”
control using a pressure sensor AKS with a pressure range
6-50 Terminal 42 Output
of -1 : 12 bar.
Option: Function:
Select the function of Terminal 42 as an
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
analog current output. Depending on the
Range: Function: selection the output is either a 0-20 mA or
1.00V* [-10.0 - par. This analog input scaling value 4-20 mA output. The current value can be
6-11] should correspond to the minimum read out in LCP in 16-65 Analog Output 42
output value of the pressure sensor [mA].
[0] No There is no signal on the analog output.
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
operation
Range: Function:
[100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.
5.00V* [6-10 to 10 V] This analog input scaling value should frequency
correspond to the maximum output 0-20 mA
value of the pressure sensor.
[101] Reference 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max] 0% = 0 mA;
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 0-20 mA 100% = 20 mA
3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max] -100% = 0
Range: Function:
mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 mA
4.0mA * [0.0 to par. 6-13 This reference signal should
[103] Motor Value is taken from 16-37 Inv. Max. Current.
mA] correspond to the minimum output
current Inverter max. current (160% current) is equal
value of the pressure sensor.
0-20 mA to 20 mA.

6-50 Terminal 42 Output 6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24 Ex: 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode: 200% and
A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode: 200%. 20
A Read-out 11.46 mA. mA = 200% Motoric and 4 mA = 200%
20 mA x 22 A Generatoric.
= 11.46 mA
38.4 A
0mA 4mA 12 mA 20 mA
130BB372.10
In case the norm motor current is equal to
Par 4-17 0% Torque Par 4-16
20 mA, the output setting of 6-52 Terminal 42 (200%) (200%)
Output Max Scale is:

I VLT x 100
Max 38.4 x 100 Figure 6.8
= = 175 %
I Motor 22
Norm
[104] Torque rel The torque setting is related to setting in
6 6 to lim 0-20 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode [0] * No
operation
When no signal on the analog output.
mA
[105] Torque rel The torque is related to the motor torque [52] MCO
to rated setting. 0-20mA
motor [53] MCO
torque 0-20 4-20mA
mA [100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.
[106] Power 0-20 Taken from 1-20 Motor Power [kW]. frequency
mA [101] Reference 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max] 0% = 0 mA;
[107] Speed 0-20 Taken from 3-03 Maximum Reference. 20 mA 100% = 20 mA
mA = value in 3-03 Maximum Reference 3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max] -100% = 0
[108] Torque ref. Torque reference related to 160% torque. mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 mA
0-20 mA [102] Feedback
[109] Max Out In relation to 4-19 Max Output Frequency. [103] Motor Value is taken from 16-37 Inv. Max. Current.
Freq 0-20 current Inverter max. current (160% current) is equal
mA to 20 mA.
[134] Torque% The torque setting is related to setting in Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24
lim. 4-20 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode. A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22A
mA Read-out 11.46 mA.
I VLT x 100
[135] Torque% The torque setting is related to the motor Max 38.4 x 100
= = 175 %
nom 4-20 torque setting. I Motor 22
Norm
mA In case the norm motor current is equal to
[141] Bus ctrl. 4-54 Warning Reference Low defines the 20 mA, the output setting of 6-52 Terminal 42
0-20 mA, behavior of the analog output in case of bus Output Max Scale is:
timeout time-out. I VLT x 100
Max 38.4 x 100
[142] Bus ctrl. 4-54 Warning Reference Low defines the = = 175 %
I Motor 22
Norm
4-20 mA, behavior of the analog output in case of bus
[104] Torque rel The torque setting is related to setting in
timeout time-out.
to limit 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
[150] Max Out In relation to 4-19 Max Output Frequency.
[105] Torq relate The torque is related to the motor torque
Freq 4-20
to rated setting.
mA
[106] Power Taken from 1-20 Motor Power [kW].
[119] Torque %
lim [107] Speed Taken from 3-03 Maximum Reference. 20 mA
= value in 3-03 Maximum Reference
[149] Torque % Analog output at zero torque = 12 mA.
lim 4-20mA Motoric torque will increase the output [108] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque.
current to max torque limit 20 mA (set in [109] Max Out 0 Hz = 0 mA,4-19 Max Output Frequency = 20
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode). Freq mA.
Generative torque will decrease the output to [130] Output 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA
torque limit Generator Mode (set in freq.
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode) 4-20mA

6-50 Terminal 42 Output 6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale

[131] Reference 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max] 0% = 4 mA; 0 %* [0 - 200 Scale for the minimum output (0 or 4 mA) of
4-20mA 100% = 20 mA %] the analog signal at terminal 42.
3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max] -100% = 4 Set the value to be the percentage of the full
mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20 mA range of the variable selected in
[132] Feedback 6-50 Terminal 42 Output.
4-20mA
[133] Motor cur. Value is taken from 16-37 Inv. Max. Current. 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
4-20mA Inverter max. current (160% current) is equal Range: Function:
to 20 mA. 100 [0 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24 %* 200 %] analog signal at terminal 42. Set the value to
6 6
A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22 the maximum value of the current signal output.
A Read-out 11.46 mA. Scale the output to give a current lower than 20
16 mA x 22 A
+ 4 mA = 13.17 mA mA at full scale; or 20 mA at an output below
38.4 A
In case the norm motor current is equal to 100% of the maximum signal value. If 20 mA is
20 mA, the output setting of 6-62 Terminal the desired output current at a value between 0
X30/8 Max. Scale is: - 100% of the full-scale output, programme the
I VLT x 100 percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20
Max 38.4 x 100
= = 175 % mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA is desired
I Motor 22
Norm
at maximum output (100%), calculate the
[134] Torq.% lim The torque setting is related to setting in percentage value as follows:
4-20 mA 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
[135] Torq.% The torque setting is related to the motor 20 mA / desired maximum current x 100 %
nom 4-20 torque setting. 20
i .e . 10 mA : x 100 = 200 %
10
mA
130BA075.11
Current
[136] Power Taken from 1-20 Motor Power [kW] (mA)
20
4-20mA
[137] Speed Taken from 3-03 Maximum Reference. 20 mA
4-20mA = Value in 3-03 Maximum Reference.
0/4
[138] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque. 0% Analog Analog 100% Variable for
output
output Min Output Max
example: Speed
4-20mA Scale Scale
par. 6-51 par. 6-52 (RPM)
[139] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process Figure 6.9 Output Max Scale
0-20 mA data. The output will work independently of
internal functions in the frequency converter.
[140] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process 6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
4-20 mA data. The output will work independently of
Range: Function:
internal functions in the frequency converter.
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output 42 if controlled by
[141] Bus ctrl 4-54 Warning Reference Low defines the
bus.
0-20mA t.o. behavior of the analog output in case of bus
time-out.
[142] Bus ctrl 4-54 Warning Reference Low defines the
4-20mA t.o. behavior of the analog output in case of bus
time-out.
[150] Max Out Fr 0 Hz = 0 mA,4-19 Max Output Frequency = 20
4-20mA mA.

6.8 Par. Group 7 - Controllers Feedback
175ZA293.11
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time Disturbed feedback signal
Range: Function:
Size [0.1 - Set a time constant for the speed control low-
related* 100 pass filter. The low-pass filter improves
ms] steady-state performance and dampens
oscillations on the feedback signal. This is an
advantage if there is a great amount on noise
in the system, see Figure 6.10. For example, if
a time constant (τ) of 100 ms is programmed,
the cut-off frequency for the low-pass filter
will be 1/0.1= 10 RAD/s., corresponding to
6 6 (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. The PID regulator only
regulates a feedback signal that varies by a
frequency of less than 1.6 Hz. If the feedback
signal varies by a higher frequency than 1.6 0.6 t (Sec.)
Hz, the PID regulator does not react.

Practical settings of 7-06 Speed PID Lowpass
Filter Time taken from the number of pulses Lowpass filter
per revolutions from encoder:
fg = 10 Hz
Encoder PPR 7-06 Speed PID
Lowpass Filter Time
Feedback
512 10 ms
1024 5 ms
2048 2 ms Filtered feedback signal
4096 1 ms
NOTICE!
Severe filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
This parameter is used with 1-00 Configuration Mode [1]
Speed closed loop and [2] Torque control.
The filter time in flux sensorless must be adjusted to
3-5 ms.
0.6 t (Sec.)
Figure 6.10 Feedback Signal
6.8.1 7-2* Process PID Feedback
Select the feedback sources for the Process PID Control,

and how this feedback should be handled.

7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource 7-32 Process PID Start Speed

For process loop with ramping and then operate under speed
current input, 54 switch has open loop control. Thereafter, when the
to be positionned on I Process PID start speed is reached, the
(current). frequency converter will change over to
[0] No function Process PID control.
[1] Analog input 53
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain
[2] * Analog input 54
Range: Function:
[3] Frequency input 29 (FC 302
only) 2.00N/A [0.00 - 10.00 Enter the PID proportional gain. The
[4] Frequency input 33 N/A] proportional gain multiplies the error
between the set point and the
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource feedback signal. 6 6
Option: Function:
7-34 Process PID Integral Time
The effective feedback signal is made
Range: Function:
up of the sum of up to two different
input signals. Select which frequency 9.00 s* [0.01 - Enter the PID integral time. The
converter input should be treated as 10000.00 ] integrator provides an increasing gain
the source of the second of these at a constant error between the set
signals. The first input signal is point and the feedback signal. The
defined in 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 integral time is the time needed by the
Resource. integrator to reach the same gain as
the proportional gain.
[0] No function
[1] Analog Input 53 7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time
[2] Analog Input 54 Range: Function:
[3] Frequency input 29 0.00 s* [0.00 - Enter the PID differentiation time. The
[4] Frequency input 33 10.00 s ] differentiator does not react to a constant
[7] Analog input X30/11 error, but provides a gain only when the
[8] Analog input X30/12 error changes. The shorter the PID differ-
[15] Analog Input X48/2 entiation time, the stronger the gain from
the differentiator.
7-30 Process PID Normal/Inverse Control
Option: Function: NOTICE!
Inverse action has to be selected for a process
This PID parameters are confortable to start any system,
loop using a suction pressure sensor to control the
but depending on its design they have to be adjusted to
system.
follow the inertia and all responses of the real refrigeration
machine.
[0] Normal
[1] * Inverse
7-36 Process PID Differentiation Gain Limit
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup
Range: Function:
Option: Function: 5* [1 - 50 ] Enter a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). If
[0] Off Continue regulation of an error when the output there is no limit, the DG will increase when there
frequency can no longer be adjusted. are fast changes. Limit the DG to obtain a pure
[1] * On Continue regulation of an error even when the output differentiator gain at slow changes and a constant
frequency cannot be increased or decreased. differentiator gain where fast changes occur.
7-32 Process PID Start Speed

7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
3000 [Set Enter the motor speed to be attained as a
0 %* [0 - Enter the PID feed forward (FF) factor. The FF
[RPM] point ] start signal for commencement of PID
200 %] factor sends a constant fraction of the reference
control. When the power is switched on,
signal to bypass the PID control, so the PID
the frequency converter will commence

7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 7-61 Feedback 1 Source Unit
control only affects the remaining fraction of the [73] kPa
control signal. Any change to this parameter will [74] m WG
thus affect the motor speed. When the FF factor [170] psi
is activated it provides less overshoot, and high [171] lb/in2
dynamics when changing the set point. [172] in WG
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is active [173] ft WG
when 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [3]
Process. 7-62 Feedback 2 Conversion
Option: Function:
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth Selects the conversion to apply to the
6 6 Range:
5 %* [0 - 200
Function:
Enter the On Reference bandwidth. When the
feedback signal measured on the analog
input selected as feedback 2 source in 7-22
%] PID Control Error (the difference between the Process CL Feedback 2 Resource.
reference and the feedback) is less than the [0] * Linear No conversion is applied. The feedback
set value of this parameter the On Reference signal is assumed to be in the unit selected
status bit is high, i.e. =1. in 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit and enters
the process controller unchanged.
[1] Square root The square root of the feedback signal is
6.8.2 7-6* Feedback Conversion calculated before passing it to the process
controller.
Select how the signals from the feedback sources must be [2] Pressure to The feedback signal is a pressure with units
converted. temperature as specified in 7-62 Feedback 2 Source Unit.
7-60 Feedback 1 Conversion It is converted to a temperature before
passing it to the process controller. The
Option: Function:
pressure to temperature conversion is
Selects the conversion to apply to the
based on the refrigerant selected in 7-70
feedback signal measured on the analog
Refrigerant.
input selected as feedback 1 source in 7-20
Process CL Feedback 1 Resource. 7-63 Feedback 2 Source Unit
[0] * Linear No conversion is applied. The feedback Option: Function:
signal is assumed to be in the unit selected
Select the pressure unit applicable to feedback
in 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit and enters
source 1 defined in 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2
the process controller unchanged.
Resource.
[1] Square root The square root of the feedback signal is
[70] mbar
calculated before passing it to the process
[71] bar
controller.
[72] Pa
[2] Pressure to The feedback signal is a pressure with units
[73] kPa
temperature as specified in 7-61 Feedback 1 Source Unit.
[74] m WG
It is converted to a temperature before
[170] psi
passing it to the process controller. The
[171] lb/in2
pressure to temperature conversion is
based on the refrigerant selected in 7-70 [172] in WG
Refrigerant. [173] ft WG
7-61 Feedback 1 Source Unit

Option: Function:
Select the pressure unit applicable to feedback
source 1 defined in 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1
Resource.
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa

6.8.3 7-7* Pressure to Temperature Conversion
The conversion of a feedback signal P in units of a pressure to a temperature T is accomplished via the formula:
T = A2/(log(P+1)-A1) – A3
where A1, A2 and A3 are refrigerant dependent constants.
6 6
Figure 6.11 Converting Pressure to Temperature
The parameters in this group allow selection of a refrigerant, which implicitly determines the constants A1, A2 and A3.
Alternatively, user defined constants can be programmed explicitly.
7-70 Refrigerant 7-73 User Defined Refrigerant A3
[0] R22 [200.000 – Selects the value used for the constant A3
[1] R134a 300.000] in the pressure to temperature conversion
[2] * R404A formula (see parameter group 7-7* Pressure
[3] R407C to Temperature Conversion).
[4] R410A
[5] R502 6.8.4 7-8* Thermostat/Pressostat Function
[6] R744
[7] User defined The Thermostat-Pressostat Function (TPF) can be used to
stop and start the compressor when running in closed
7-71 User Defined Refrigerant A1 loop. The TPF monitors and compares the resulting
Range: Function: feedback with the Cut-out value in 7-81 Cut-out Value.
[8.0000 – Selects the value used for the constant A1 When the resulting feedback gets below 7-81 Cut-out Value
12.0000] in the pressure to temperature conversion a stop signal is generated and the compressor stops. When
formula (see parameter group 7-7* Pressure the resulting feedback gets above the Cut-in value in
to Temperature Conversion). 7-82 Cut-in Value the stop signal is removed and the
compressor starts again.
7-72 User Defined Refrigerant A2
Range: Function: The Set-point should be set to a value in between Cut-in
[-3000.00 – Selects the value used for the constant A2 and Cut-out.
-1500.00] in the pressure to temperature conversion
formula (see parameter group 7-7* Pressure
to Temperature Conversion).

7-82 Cut-in Value

Range: Function:
3 bar* [Par.7-81 – Select the Cut-in Level where the stop
3000] signal is de-activated and the
compressor starts.
6 6
Figure 6.12 Thermostat/Pressostat Function
Point A: At start-up the temperature will be higher than

wanted in the evaporator and therefore a higher pressure
than the Cut-in level and the compressor must run.
Another situation could be that the start situation is where
the feedback is between Cut-out and Cut-in. In that case,
no STOP is initiated.
Point B: After some time the cut-out level may be reached

and the compressor must be shut off.
Point C: Cut-in is reached and the compressor is restarted.
NOTICE!
When using the TPF together with the Cascade Controller
further consideration must be taken. The Cut-Out value
should be below the Override Bandwidth setting (see
25-21 Override Bandwidth). Cut-In should be set above the
set-point and below the value for Staging Bandwidth (see
25-20 Staging Bandwidth).
7-80 Thermostat/Pressostat Function

Option: Function:
[0] * Off Function is inactive
[1] On Function is active
7-81 Cut-out Value

Range: Function:
1 bar* [-3000 - par.7-82] Select the Cut-out Level where the
stop signal is activated and the
compressor stops.

6.9 Parameters: 8-** Communications and 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time
Options Range: Function:
[1.0 s] 0.1-18000.0 s Enter the maximum time expected to
6.9.1 8-0* General Settings pass between the reception of two
consecutive telegrams. If this time is
exceeded, it indicates that the serial
8-01 Control Site communication has stopped. The
Option: Function: function selected in 8-04 Control Word
The setting in this parameter overrides Timeout Function is then carried out. A
the settings in 8-50 Coasting Select to valid control word triggers the time-out
8-56 Preset Reference Select. counter.
20 s* [ 0.1 - Enter the maximum time expected to
[0] Digital and Control by using both digital input and
18000.0 s] pass between the reception of two
ctrl.word control word.
consecutive telegrams. If this time is 6 6
[1] Digital only Control by using digital inputs only. exceeded, it indicates that the serial
communication has stopped. The
[2] Controlword only Control by using control word only.
function selected in 8-04 Control Word
Timeout Functionis then carried out. A
8-02 Control Word Source
valid control word triggers the time-out
Option: Function: counter.
NOTICE!
8-04 Control Word Timeout Function
the motor is running. Select the time-out function. The time-out function activates
when the control word fails to be updated within the time
period specified in 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
Select the source of the control word: one of
two serial interfaces or four installed options. Option: Function:
During initial power-up, the frequency [0] Off Resumes control via serial bus (fieldbus or
converter automatically sets this parameter to standard) using the most recent control
[3] Option A if it detects a valid fieldbus option word.
installed in slot A. If the option is removed,
[1] Freeze output Freezes output frequency until communi-
the frequency converter detects a change in
cation resumes.
the configuration, sets 8-02 Control Word
Source back to default setting RS-485, and the [2] Stop Stops with auto restart when communi-
frequency converter trips. If an option is cation resumes.
installed after initial power-up, the setting of [3] Jogging Runs the motor at JOG frequency until
8-02 Control Word Source does not change, but communication resumes.
the frequency converter trips and displays:
[4] Max. speed Runs the motor at maximum frequency until
Alarm 67 Option Changed.
communication resumes.
When retrofitting a bus option into a
frequency converter that did not have a bus [5] Stop and trip Stops the motor, then resets the frequency
option installed to begin with, take an ACTIVE converter to restart: via the fieldbus, via
decision to move the control to Bus based. [Reset], or via a digital input.
This is done for safety reasons to avoid an
[7] Select setup 1 Changes the set-up upon reestablishment of
accidental change.
communication following a control word
[0] None time-out. If communication resumes after a
[1] FC RS-485 time-out, 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function
[2] FC USB defines whether to resume the set-up used
[3] Option A before the time-out, or to retain the set-up
[4] Option B endorsed by the time-out function.
[5] Option C0 [8] Select setup 2 See [7] Select setup 1
[6] Option C1
[9] Select setup 3 See [7] Select setup 1
[30] External
Can [10] Select setup 4 See [7] Select setup 1

8-04 Control Word Timeout Function 6.9.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
Select the time-out function. The time-out function activates
when the control word fails to be updated within the time 8-10 Control Word Profile
period specified in 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time. Select the interpretation of the control and status words
Option: Function: corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
[26] Trip for the fieldbus installed in slot A will be visible in the LCP
display.
NOTICE! For guidelines in selection of [0] FC profile and [1] PROFIdrive
To change the set-up after a time-out, the following profile, refer to the Serial communication via RS-485 Interface
configuration is required: section in the Design Guide.
Set 0-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi set-up and select the For additional guidelines in the selection of [1] PROFIdrive profile,
relevant link in 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. refer to the Operating Instructions for the installed fieldbus.
6 6 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function

Option:
[0] * FC profile
Function:
Option: Function: [1] PROFIdrive profile

Select the action after receiving a valid control
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW
word following a time-out. This parameter is
active only when 8-04 Control Timeout Function
Option: Function:
is set to [7] Set-up 1, [8] Set-up 2, [9]Set-up 3 or [0] No function The input is always low.
[10] Set-up 4. [1] * Profile Default Depended on the profile set in
8-10 Control Profile.
[0] Hold set-up Retains the set-up selected in 8-04 Control
[2] Alarm 68 Only The input goes high whenever Alarm 68
Timeout Function and displays a warning, until
is active and goes low whenever no
8-06 Reset Control Timeout toggles. Then the
alarm 68 is active.
frequency converter resumes its original set-up.
[3] Trip excl Alarm 68
[1] Resume set- Resumes the set-up active before the time-out. [16] T37 DI status The input goes high whenever T37 has
up 0 V and goes low whenever T37 has
24 V.
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout
This parameter is active only when [0] Hold set-up has been
selected in 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function. 6.9.3 8-3* FC Port Settings
Option: Function:
8-30 Protocol
[0] Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in 8-04 Control
Word Timeout Function, following a control Option: Function:
word time-out. Select the protocol to be used. Changing
protocol will not be effective until after
[1] Do reset Returns the frequency converter to the original
powering off the frequency converter.
set-up following a control word time-out. The
[0] * FC
frequency converter performs the reset and
[1] FC MC
then immediately reverts to the [0] Do not reset
setting [2] Modbus RTU
8-31 Address
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 1 - 255 ] Enter the address for the FC (standard)
port.
Valid range: 1-126.
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate

Option: Function:
[0] 2400 Baud Baud rate selection for the FC (standard) port.
[1] 4800 Baud

[2] 9600 Baud

8-32 FC Port Baud Rate 8-50 Coasting Select

[3] 19200 Baud Select control of the coasting function via the
[4] 38400 Baud terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.
[5] 57600 Baud [0] Digital Activates Start command via a digital input.
[6] 76800 Baud input
[7] 115200 Baud [1] Bus Activates Start command via the serial
communication port or fieldbus option.
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits
Option: Function: [2] Logic AND Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial
communication port, AND additionally via one
[0] Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
of the digital inputs.
[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[2]
[3]
No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
[3] Logic OR Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial
communication port OR via one of the digital 6 6
inputs.
8-35 Minimum Response Delay
Range: Function: 8-51 Quick Stop Select
10 ms* [ 1 - 10000 Specify the minimum delay time Select control of the Quick Stop function via the terminals
ms] between receiving a request and (digital input) and/or via the bus.
transmitting a response. This is used for Option: Function:
overcoming modem turnaround delays.
[0] Digital input
[1] Bus
8-36 Max Response Delay
[2] Logic AND
Range: Function: [3] Logic OR
Size [ 11 - Specify the maximum permissible
related* 10001 ms] delay time between transmitting a 8-52 DC Brake Select
request and receiving a response. If a Option: Function:
response from the frequency Select control of the DC brake via the terminals
converter is exceeding the time (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.
setting then it will be discarded.
NOTICE!
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay Only selection [0] Digital input is available
when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1]
Range: Function:
PM non-salient SPM.
Size [ 0.00 - Specify the maximum permissible
related* 35.00 ms] time interval between receipt of two
[0] Digital Activates Start command via a digital input.
bytes. This parameter activates time-
input
out if transmission is interrupted.
This parameter is active only when 8-53 Start Select
8-30 Protocol is set to [1] FC MC
Option: Function:
protocol.
Select control of the frequency converter start
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or
6.9.4 8-5* Digital/Bus via the fieldbus.
[0] Digital Activates Start command via a digital input.

Parameters for configuring the control word Digital/Bus input
merging. [1] Bus Activates Start command via the serial
NOTICE! [2] Logic AND Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial
These parameters are active only when 8-01 Control Site is communication port, AND additionally via one
set to [0] Digital and control word. of the digital inputs.

8-53 Start Select 8-56 Preset Reference Select

[3] Logic OR Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial [3] Logic OR Activates the Preset Reference selection via the
communication port OR via one of the digital fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
inputs. of the digital inputs.
8-54 Reverse Select

6.9.5 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
Option: Function:
[0] Digital Select control of the frequency converter
These parameters are used for monitoring the Bus
input reverse function via the terminals (digital input)
communication via the FC Port.
and/or via the fieldbus.
8-80 Bus Message Count
[1] Bus Activates the Reverse command via the serial
6 6 communication port or fieldbus option. Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
[2] Logic AND Activates the Reverse command via the
telegrams detected on the bus.
fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
additionally via one of the digital inputs.
8-81 Bus Error Count
[3] Logic OR Activates the Reverse command via the Range: Function:
fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of telegrams
of the digital inputs.
with faults (e.g. CRC fault), detected on the bus.
8-55 Set-up Select

8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd
Option: Function:
Range: Function:
Select control of the frequency converter set-up
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
selection via the terminals (digital input) and/or
telegrams addressed to the slave, sent by the
via the fieldbus.
[0] Digital Activates the set-up selection via a digital input.
input 8-83 Slave Error Count
[1] Bus Activates the set-up selection via the serial Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of error
[2] Logic AND Activates the set-up selection via the fieldbus/ telegrams, which could not be executed by the
serial communication port, AND additionally via frequency converter.
one of the digital inputs.
[3] Logic OR Activate the set-up selection via the fieldbus/ 6.9.6 8-9* Bus Jog
serial communication port OR via one of the
digital inputs.
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
8-56 Preset Reference Select Range: Function:

100 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
Option: Function:
RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
Select control of the frequency converter Preset
or fieldbus option.
Reference selection via the terminals (digital
input) and/or via the fieldbus.
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed
[0] Digital Activates Preset Reference selection via a digital
Range: Function:
input input.
200 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
[1] Bus Activates Preset Reference selection via the RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
serial communication port or fieldbus option. or fieldbus option.
[2] Logic AND Activates Preset Reference selection via the
fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
additionally via one of the digital inputs.

When the last event/action has been executed, the

sequence starts over again from event [0]/action [0]. The
6.10 Par. Group 13 - Smart Logic Control illustration shows an example with three event/actions:
6.10.1 Prog. Features
Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of user

defined actions (see 13-52 SL Controller Action [x]) executed
by the SLC when the associated user defined event (see
13-51 SL Controller Event [x]) is evaluated as TRUE by the
SLC.
The condition for an event can be a particular status or
that the output from a Logic Rule or a Comparator
Operand becomes TRUE. That will lead to an associated
Action as illustrated: 6 6
Par. 13-51 Par. 13-51
130BB671.10
SL Controller Event SL Controller Action
Figure 6.14 Events and Actions

Running Coast
Warning Start timer
Torque limit Set Do X low
Digital inpute X 30/2 Select set-up 2 Starting and stopping the SLC:
... ...
Starting and stopping the SLC can be done by
Par. 13-43 selecting .On [1]. or .Off [0]. in 13-00 SL Controller Mode.
Logic Rule Operator 2 The SLC always starts in state 0 (where it evaluates event
[0]). The SLC starts when the Start Event (defined in
13-01 Start Event) is evaluated as TRUE (provided that On
[1] is selected in 13-00 SL Controller Mode). The SLC stops
...
... when the Stop Event (13-02 Stop Event) is TRUE. 13-03 Reset
SLC resets all SLC parameters and start programming from
Par. 13-43
scratch.
Comparator Operator
= NOTICE!
TRUE longer than..
SLC is only active in AUTO mode, not Hand On mode
...
...
6.10.2 13-0* SLC Settings
Figure 6.13 Smart Logic Control (SLC)
Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate and reset the
Smart Logic Control sequence. The logic functions and
comparators are always running in the background, which
Events and actions are each numbered and linked together
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.
in pairs (states). This means that when event [0] is fulfilled
(attains the value TRUE), action [0] is executed. After this, 13-00 SLC Controller Mode
the conditions of event [1] will be evaluated and if Option: Function:
evaluated TRUE, action [1] will be executed and so on. [ 0] * Off Disables the Smart Logic Control.
Only one event will be evaluated at any time. If an event is [1] On Enables the Smart Logic Control to start when a start
evaluated as FALSE, nothing happens (in the SLC) during command is present, e.g. via a digital input.
the current scan interval and no other events will be
evaluated. This means that when the SLC starts, it 13-01 Start Event
evaluates event [0] (and only event [0]) each scan interval. Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic
Only when event [0] is evaluated TRUE, will the SLC Control.
execute action [0] and start evaluating event [1]. It is
Option: Function:
possible to programme from 1 to 20 events and actions.
[0] FALSE Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE)
input to activate Smart Logic Control.

13-01 Start Event 13-01 Start Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic
Control. Control.
Enters the fixed value - FALSE counter clockwise (the logical product
of the status bits “running” AND
[1] TRUE Enters the fixed value - TRUE.
“reverse”).
[2] Running The motor is running.
[19] Warning A warning is active.
[3] In range The motor is running within the
[20] Alarm (trip) A (trip) alarm is active.
programmed current and speed
ranges set in 4-50 Warning Current [21] Alarm (trip lock) A (Trip lock) alarm is active.
Low to 4-53 Warning Speed High.
[22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0.
6 6 [4] On reference The motor is running on reference.
[5] Torque limit The torque limit, set in 4-16 Torque
Limit Motor Mode or 4-17 Torque Limit
Generator Mode, has been exceeded. [25] Comparator 3 Use the result of comparator 3.
[6] Current Limit The motor current limit, set in [26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0.
4-18 Current Limit, has been [27] Logic rule 1 Use the result of logic rule 1.
exceeded.
[28] Logic rule 2 Use the result of logic rule 2.
[7] Out of current The motor current is outside the
range range set in 4-18 Current Limit.
[33] Digital input DI18 Use the result of digital input 18.
[8] Below I low The motor current is lower than set
in 4-50 Warning Current Low. [34] Digital input DI19 Use the result of digital input 19.
[9] Above I high The motor current is higher than set [35] Digital input DI27 Use the result of digital input 27.
in 4-51 Warning Current High.
[10] Out of speed range The speed is outside the range set in
4-52 Warning Speed Low and
4-53 Warning Speed High. [38] Digital input DI33 Use the result of digital input 33.
[11] Below speed low The output speed is lower than the [39] Start command A start command is issued.
setting in 4-52 Warning Speed Low. [40] Drive stopped A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,
[12] Above speed high The output speed is higher than the Coast) is issued – and not from the
setting in 4-53 Warning Speed High. SLC itself.
[13] Out of feedb. range The feedback is outside the range set [41] Reset Trip A reset is issued
in 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and [42] Auto-reset Trip An Auto reset is performed.
4-57 Warning Feedback High.
[43] OK key [OK] is pressed.
[14] Below feedb. low The feedback is below the limit set in
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed.
4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
[45] Left key [◄] is pressed.
[15] Above feedb. high The feedback is above the limit set in
4-57 Warning Feedback High. [46] Right key [►] is pressed.
[16] Thermal warning The thermal warning turns on when [47] Up key [▲] is pressed.
the temperature exceeds the limit in
the motor, the frequency converter,
[48] Down key [▼] is pressed.
the brake resistor or the thermistor. [50] Comparator 4 Use the result of comparator 4.
[17] Mains out of range The mains voltage is outside the [51] Comparator 5 Use the result of comparator 5.
specified voltage range.
[18] Reverse The output is high when the
frequency converter is running

13-01 Start Event 13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
Control. Logic Control.
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* [23] Comparator 1
Comparators [24] Comparator 2
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* [25] Comparator 3

Comparators [26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1*
[28] Logic rule 2
Comparators
[29] Logic rule 3
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1* [30] SL Timeout 0
[98] RS Flipflop 4
Comparators
See parameter group 13-1*

[31]
[32]
SL Timeout 1
SL Timeout 2
6 6
Comparators [33] Digital input DI18
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* [34] Digital input DI19
Comparators [35] Digital input DI27
[36] Digital input DI29
Comparators
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* [39] Start command
Comparators [40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
13-02 Stop Event
[42] Auto-reset Trip
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart [43] OK key
Logic Control. [44] Reset key
Option: Function: [45] Left key
[0] FALSE For descriptions [0]-[61], see [46] Right key
13-01 Start Event Start Event [47] Up key
[1] TRUE [48] Down key
[2] Running [50] Comparator 4
[3] In range [51] Comparator 5
[4] On reference [60] Logic rule 4
[5] Torque limit [61] Logic rule 5
[6] Current Limit [70] SL Timeout 3 Smart Logic Controller timer 3 is

timed out.
[7] Out of current range
[8] Below I low [71] SL Timeout 4 Smart Logic Controller timer 4 is
[9] Above I high timed out.
[10] Out of speed range [72] SL Timeout 5 Smart Logic Controller timer 5 is
[11] Below speed low timed out.
[12] Above speed high
[73] SL Timeout 6 Smart Logic Controller timer 6 is
[13] Out of feedb. range
timed out.
[14] Below feedb. low
[15] Above feedb. high [74] SL Timeout 7 Smart Logic Controller timer 7 is
[16] Thermal warning timed out.
[17] Mains out of range [75] Start command given

[18] Reverse [76] Digital input x30/2
[19] Warning [77] Digital input x30/3
[20] Alarm (trip) [78] Digital input x30/4
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [79] Digital input x46/1
[22] Comparator 0 [80] Digital input x46/3

13-02 Stop Event 13-03 Reset SLC

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart Option: Function:
Logic Control. [0] Do not reset Retains programmed settings in all
Option: Function: SLC parameter group 13-** Smart Logic Control.
[81] Digital input x46/5 [1] Reset SLC Resets all parameters in parameter group 13-
[82] Digital input x46/7 ** Smart Logic Control to default settings.
[83] Digital input x46/9
6.10.3 13-1* Comparators
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables
Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
(i.e. output frequency, output current, analog input etc.) to
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
6 6
fixed preset values.
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is
active, the output will be 1.
Par. 13-11
130BB672.10
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal Comparator Operator
Par. 13-10
Comparator Operand
=
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is TRUE longer than.
Par. 13-12
active, the output will be 1. Comparator Value ...
...
[92] ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
Figure 6.15 Comparators
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is
In addition, there are digital values that will be compared
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal to fixed time values. See explanation in 13-10 Comparator
Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR Operand. Comparators are evaluated once in each scan
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the interval. Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) directly. All
warning 165 ATEX ETR parameters in this parameter group are array parameters
freq.lim.warning is active, the with index 0 to 5. Select index 0 to programme
output will be 1. Comparator 0, select index 1 to programme Comparator 1,
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* and so on.
Comparators 13-10 Comparator Operand
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* Array [6]
Comparators
Option: Function:
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* Choices [1] to [31] are variables which
Comparators will be compared based on their
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1* values. Choices [50] to [186] are digital
Comparators values (TRUE/FALSE) where the
comparison is based on the amount of
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* time during which they are set to
Comparators TRUE or FALSE, respectively. See
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* 13-11 Comparator Operator.
Comparators Select the variable to be monitored by
the comparator.
Comparators [0] DISABLED The comparator is disabled.
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* [1] Reference The resulting remote reference (not
Comparators local) as a percentage.
[2] Feedback In the unit [RPM] or [Hz]
[3] Motor speed [RPM] or [Hz]

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6] Array [6]
[4] Motor Current [A] [56] In range The motor is running within the
programmed current and speed ranges
[5] Motor torque [Nm]
set in 4-50 Warning Current Low to
[6] Motor power [kW] or [hp] 4-53 Warning Speed High.
[7] Motor voltage [V] [60] On reference The motor is running on reference.
[8] DC-link voltage [V] [61] Below Reference The motor is running below the value
[9] Motor Thermal Expressed as a percentage. Low given in 4-54 Warning Reference Low.
[10] VLT temp. Expressed as a percentage. [62] Above ref, high The motor is running above the value
[11] Heat sink temp. Expressed as a percentage.

[65] Torque limit
given in 4-55 Warning Reference High
The torque limit, set in 4-16 Torque

6 6
[12] Analog input AI53 Expressed as a percentage.
Limit Motor Mode or 4-17 Torque Limit
[13] Analog input AI54 Expressed as a percentage. Generator Mode, has been exceeded.
[14] Analog input [V]. AIFB10 is internal 10 V supply. [66] Current Limit The motor current limit, set in
AIFB10 4-18 Current Limit, has been exceeded.
[15] Analog input [V] Analog input AICCT [17] [°]. AIS24V
[67] Out of current The motor current is outside the range
AIS24V is switch mode power supply: SMPS
range set in 4-18 Current Limit.
24V.
[68] Below I low The motor current is lower than set in
[17] Analog input [°]. AICCT is control card temperature.
4-50 Warning Current Low.
AICCT
[18] Pulse input FI29 Expressed as a percentage. [69] Above I high The motor current is higher than set in
4-51 Warning Current High.
[19] Pulse input FI33 Expressed as a percentage.
[70] Out of speed The speed is outside the range set in
[20] Alarm number The error number. range 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
[21] Warning number 4-53 Warning Speed High.
[22] Analog input x30 [71] Below speed low The output speed is lower than the
11 setting in 4-52 Warning Speed Low.
[23] Analog input x30
[72] Above speed high The output speed is higher than the
12
setting in 4-53 Warning Speed High.
[30] Counter A Number of counts
[75] Out of feedb. The feedback is outside the range set
[31] Counter B Number of counts
range in 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and
[50] FALSE Enters the fixed value of false in the 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
comparator.
[76] Below feedback The feedback is below the limit set in
[51] TRUE Enters the fixed value of true in the low 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
comparator.
[77] Above feedback The feedback is above the limit set in
[52] Control ready The control board receives supply high 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
voltage
[80] Thermal warning The thermal warning turns on when
[53] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for the temperature exceeds the limit in
operation and applies a supply signal the motor, the frequency converter,
on the control board. the brake resistor or thermistor.
[54] Running The motor is running. [82] Line pwr out of The mains voltage is outside the
[55] Reversing The output is high when the range specified voltage range.
frequency converter is running counter [85] Warning A warning is active.
clockwise (the logical product of the
[86] ALARM (Trip) A (trip) alarm is active.
status bits “running” AND “reverse”).
[87] ALARM (Trip Lock) A (Trip lock) alarm is active.

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6] Array [6]
[90] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out) [152] SL digital output Use the result of the SLC output C.
via the serial communication port. C
[91] Torque limit & If the frequency converter has received [153] SL digital output Use the result of the SLC output D.
stop a stop signal and is at the torque limit, D
the signal is logic “0”. [154] SL digital output E Use the result of the SLC output E.
[92] Brake fault (IGBT) The brake IGBT is short circuited. [155] SL digital output F Use the result of the SLC output F.
[93] Mech. brake The mechanical brake is active. [160] Relay 1 Relay 1 is active
control [161] Relay 2 Relay 2 is active
6 6 [94] Safe stop active

[100] Comparator 0 The result of comparator 0.
[180] Local reference High when 3-13 Reference Site = [2]
active Local or when 3-13 Reference Site is [0]
[101] Comparator 1 The result of comparator 1. Linked to hand Auto, at the same time
as the LCP is in Hand On mode.
[181] Remote ref. active High when 3-13 Reference Site= [1]
Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto,
[104] Comparator 4 The result of comparator 4. while the LCP is in Auto On mode.
[105] Comparator 5 The result of comparator 5. [182] Start command High when there is an active start
[110] Logic rule 0 The result of Logic rule 0. command, and no stop command.
[111] Logic rule 1 The result of Logic rule 1. [183] Drive stopped A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,
Coast) is issued – and not from the
[112] Logic rule 2 The result of Logic rule 2.
SLC itself.
[113] Logic rule 3 The result of Logic rule 3.
[185] Drive in hand High when the frequency converter is
[114] Logic rule 4 The result of Logic rule 4. mode in hand mode.
[115] Logic rule 5 The result of Logic rule 5. [186] Drive in auto High when the frequency converter is
mode in auto mode.
[120] SL Timeout 0 The result of SLC timer 0.
[187] Start command
given
[122] SL Timeout 2 The result of SLC timer 2. [190] Digital input x30 2
[192] Digital input x30 4
[130] Digital input DI18 Digital input 18. High = True.
[131] Digital input DI19 Digital input 19. High = True. [199] Digital input x46 7
[132] Digital input DI27 Digital input 27. High = True.
13-11 Comparator Operator
[133] Digital input DI29 Digital input 29. High = True. Array [6]
[134] Digital input DI32 Digital input 32. High = True. Option: Function:
[135] Digital input DI33 Digital input 33. High = True. Select the operator to be used in the
comparison. This is an array parameter
[150] SL digital output Use the result of the SLC output A.
containing comparator operators 0 to 5.
A
[151] SL digital output Use the result of the SLC output B. [0] < The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the
B variable selected in 13-10 Comparator Operand

13-11 Comparator Operator
130BB960.10
S
Array [6]
R
Option: Function:
is smaller than the fixed value in Flip Flop Output
13-12 Comparator Value. The result is FALSE, if
Figure 6.17 Flip Flop Outputs
the variable selected in 13-10 Comparator
Operand is greater than the fixed value in
13-12 Comparator Value.
The two operators can be selected from a long list. As a
[1] = (equal) The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the special case, the same digital input can be used as both
variable selected in 13-10 Comparator Operand Set and Reset, making it possible to use the same digital
is approximately equal to the fixed value in input as start/stop. The following settings can be used to
13-12 Comparator Value. set up the same digital input as start/stop (example given
[2] > Inverse logic of option < [0]. with DI32 but is not a requirement). 6 6
[5] TRUE longer
Parameter Setting Notes
than...
13-00 SL Controller Mode On
[6] FALSE longer
13-01 Start Event TRUE
than...
13-02 Stop Event FALSE
[7] TRUE shorter
than... [37] Digital
[8] FALSE 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 [0]
Input DI32
shorter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 [0] [2] Running
than...
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 [3] AND
13-12 Comparator Value [0] NOT
Array [6] [37] Digital

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 [1]
Range: Function: Input DI32
Size related* [-100000 - Enter the ‘trigger level’ for the 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 [1] [2] Running
100000 ] variable that is monitored by this 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
[1] AND
comtor. This is an array parameter [1]
containing comtor values 0 to 5.
[26] Output from 13-41
13-15 RS-FF Operand S [0]
Logicrule 0 [0]
6.10.4 13-1* RS Flip Flops [27] Output from 13-41
13-16 RS-FF Operand R [0]
Logicrule 1 [1]
The Reset/Set Flip Flops hold the signal until set/reset.
Output from
[94] RS
13-51 SL Controller Event [0] evaluating 13-15
130BB959.10
Flipflop 0
Par. 13-15 and 13-16
RS-FF Operand S 13-52 SL Controller Action [0] [22] Run
Par. 13-16
RS-FF Operand R
[27]
13-51 SL Controller Event [1]
Logicrule 1
Figure 6.16 Reset/Set Flip Flops 13-52 SL Controller Action [1] [24] Stop
Table 6.9 Operators

Two parameters are used and the output can be used in
the logic rules and as events. 13-15 RS-FF Operand S
Option: Function:
[0] FALSE
[1] TRUE
[2] Running
[3] In range

13-15 RS-FF Operand S 13-15 RS-FF Operand S

[4] On reference [70] SL Timeout 3
[5] Torque limit [71] SL Timeout 4
[6] Current Limit [72] SL Timeout 5
[7] Out of current range [73] SL Timeout 6
[8] Below I low [74] SL Timeout 7
[9] Above I high [75] Start command given
[10] Out of speed range [76] Digital input x30/2
[11] Below speed low [77] Digital input x30/3
[12] Above speed high [78] Digital input x30/4
[13] Out of feedb. range [79] Digital input x46/1
6 6 [14]
[15]
Below feedb. low
Above feedb. high
[80]
[81]
Digital input x46/3
Digital input x46/5
[16] Thermal warning [82] Digital input x46/7
[17] Mains out of range [83] Digital input x46/9
[20] Alarm (trip) [90] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[22] Comparator 0 [92] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[23] Comparator 1 [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[24] Comparator 2 [94] RS Flipflop 0
[26] Logic rule 0 [96] RS Flipflop 2
[30] SL Timeout 0 [100] RS Flipflop 6
[32] SL Timeout 2
13-16 RS-FF Operand R
[34] Digital input DI19 Option: Function:
[35] Digital input DI27 [0] FALSE
[36] Digital input DI29 [1] TRUE
[37] Digital input DI32 [2] Running
[38] Digital input DI33 [3] In range
[39] Start command [4] On reference
[40] Drive stopped [5] Torque limit
[41] Reset Trip [6] Current Limit
[42] Auto-reset Trip [7] Out of current range
[43] OK key [8] Below I low
[44] Reset key [9] Above I high
[45] Left key [10] Out of speed range
[46] Right key [11] Below speed low
[47] Up key [12] Above speed high
[48] Down key [13] Out of feedb. range
[50] Comparator 4 [14] Below feedb. low
[51] Comparator 5 [15] Above feedb. high
[60] Logic rule 4 [16] Thermal warning
[61] Logic rule 5 [17] Mains out of range

13-16 RS-FF Operand R 13-16 RS-FF Operand R

[19] Warning [90] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[20] Alarm (trip) [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [92] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[22] Comparator 0 [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[28]
[29]
Logic rule 2
Logic rule 3
[99]
[100]
RS Flipflop 5
RS Flipflop 6
6 6
[31] SL Timeout 1
[32] SL Timeout 2 6.10.5 13-2* Timers
[34] Digital input DI19 Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) from timers directly to
[35] Digital input DI27 define an event (see 13-51 SL Controller Event), or as
[36] Digital input DI29 boolean input in a logic rule (see 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean
[37] Digital input DI32 1, 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 or 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3).
[38] Digital input DI33 A timer is only FALSE when started by an action (i.e. [29]
[39] Start command Start timer 1) until the timer value entered in this
[40] Drive stopped parameter is elapsed. Then it becomes TRUE again.
[41] Reset Trip All parameters in this parameter group are array
[42] Auto-reset Trip parameters with index 0 to 2. Select index 0 to program
[43] OK key
Timer 0, select index 1 to program Timer 1, and so on.
[44] Reset key 13-20 SL Controller Timer
[45] Left key Range: Function:
[46] Right key
Size [ 0.000 - Enter the value to define the duration
[47] Up key related* 0.000 ] of the FALSE output from the
[48] Down key programmed timer. A timer is only
[50] Comparator 4 FALSE if it is started by an action (i.e.
[51] Comparator 5 [29] Start timer 1) and until the given
[60] Logic rule 4 timer value has elapsed.
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Timeout 3
[71] SL Timeout 4
6.10.6 13-4* Logic Rules
[72] SL Timeout 5
Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (TRUE/FALSE inputs) from
[73] SL Timeout 6
timers, comtors, digital inputs, status bits and events using
[74] SL Timeout 7
the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select boolean
[75] Start command given
inputs for the calculation in 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 and 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[77] Digital input x30/3 Define the operators used to logically combine the
[78] Digital input x30/4 selected inputs in 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and
[79] Digital input x46/1 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.

Par. 13-41 Par. 13-43 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
130BB673.10
Logic Rule Operator 1 Logic Rule Operator 2
Par. 13-40
Array [6]
Logic Rule Boolean 1
Par. 13-42 Option: Function:
Logic Rule Boolean 2 ...
... [25] Comparator 3
...
... [26] Logic rule 0
Par. 13-44 [27] Logic rule 1
Logic Rule Boolean 3 [28] Logic rule 2
Figure 6.18 Logic Rules [29] Logic rule 3
[30] SL Timeout 0
[31] SL Timeout 1
Priority of calculation [32] SL Timeout 2
The results of 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, 13-41 Logic Rule [33] Digital input DI18
6 6 Operator 1 and 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 are calculated
first. The outcome (TRUE/FALSE) of this calculation is
[34]
[35]
Digital input DI19
Digital input DI27
combined with the settings of 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 [36] Digital input DI29
and 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3, yielding the final result
(TRUE/FALSE) of the logic rule.
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 [39] Start command
Array [6] [40] Drive stopped
Option: Function: [41] Reset Trip

[42] Auto-reset Trip
[0] FALSE Select the first boolean (TRUE or
[43] OK key
FALSE) input for the selected logic
rule. [44] Reset key
See 13-01 Start Event ([0] - [61]) [45] Left key
and 13-02 Stop Event ([70] - [75]) [46] Right key
for further description. [47] Up key
[48] Down key
[1] TRUE
[50] Comparator 4
[2] Running
[51] Comparator 5
[3] In range
[60] Logic rule 4
[4] On reference
[61] Logic rule 5
[5] Torque limit
[70] SL Timeout 3
[6] Current Limit
[71] SL Timeout 4
[72] SL Timeout 5
[8] Below I low
[73] SL Timeout 6
[9] Above I high
[74] SL Timeout 7
[10] Out of speed range
[11] Below speed low
[15] Above feedb. high
[16] Thermal warning
[17] Mains out of range
[18] Reverse
[19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Array [6] Array [6]
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is [5] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND
active, the output will be 1. [13-42].
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable if1-90 Motor Thermal [6] NOT OR Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR
Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR [13-42].
[7] NOT AND NOT Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is
NOT [13-42].
[8] NOT OR NOT Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR
[92] ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
NOT [13-42].
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2
6 6
Array [6]
Option: Function:
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[0] FALSE Select the second boolean (TRUE
or FALSE) input for the selected
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the
logic rule. See 13-01 Start Event
warning 165 ATEX ETR
([0] - [61]) and 13-02 Stop Event
freq.lim.warning is active, the
([70] - [75]) for further description.
output will be 1.
[1] TRUE
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators
[2] Running
[3] In range
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See 13-1* Comparators [4] On reference
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See 13-1* Comparators [5] Torque limit

[6] Current Limit
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See 13-1* Comparators [8] Below I low
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See 13-1* Comparators [9] Above I high
[10] Out of speed range
[11] Below speed low
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
Array [6]
Option: Function: [15] Above feedb. high
Select the first logical operator to use on the [16] Thermal warning
Boolean inputs from 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean [17] Mains out of range
1 and 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [18] Reverse
[13-**] signifies the boolean input of
[19] Warning
parameter group 13-** Smart Logic Control.
[20] Alarm (trip)
[0] DISABLED Ignores 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, [21] Alarm (trip lock)
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2, and 13-44 Logic [22] Comparator 0
Rule Boolean 3. [23] Comparator 1
[1] AND Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42]. [24] Comparator 2
[25] Comparator 3
[2] OR Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR [13-42].
[26] Logic rule 0
[3] AND NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT [27] Logic rule 1
[13-42]. [28] Logic rule 2
[4] OR NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT [29] Logic rule 3
[13-42]. [30] SL Timeout 0

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6] Array [6]
[31] SL Timeout 1 [92] ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[32] SL Timeout 2 Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[33] Digital input DI18 or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
[34] Digital input DI19 163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is
[35] Digital input DI27 active, the output will be 1.
[36] Digital input DI29 [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[37] Digital input DI32 Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[38] Digital input DI33 or [21] Advanced ETR. If the
[39] Start command warning 165 ATEX ETR
6 6 [40]
[41]
Drive stopped
Reset Trip
output will be 1.
[42] Auto-reset Trip [94] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators
[43] OK key
[44] Reset key
[45] Left key [96] RS Flipflop 2 See 13-1* Comparators
[46] Right key [97] RS Flipflop 3 See 13-1* Comparators
[47] Up key
[48] Down key
[50] Comparator 4 [99] RS Flipflop 5 See 13-1* Comparators
[51] Comparator 5 [100] RS Flipflop 6 See 13-1* Comparators

[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Timeout 3 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
[71] SL Timeout 4
Array [6]
[72] SL Timeout 5
Option: Function:
[73] SL Timeout 6
Select the second logical operator to be used
[74] SL Timeout 7
on the boolean input calculated in
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, 13-41 Logic Rule
Operator 1, and 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,
and the boolean input coming from
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[79] Digital input x46/1 [13-44] signifies the boolean input of
[80] Digital input x46/3 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[81] Digital input x46/5 [13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input
[82] Digital input x46/7 calculated in 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
[83] Digital input x46/9 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and 13-42 Logic
[84] Digital input x46/11 Rule Boolean 2. [0] DISABLED (factory setting).
[85] Digital input x46/13 select this option to ignore 13-44 Logic Rule
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal Boolean 3.
Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR [0] DISABLED
[1] AND
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is
[2] OR
[3] AND NOT
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal [4] OR NOT
Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR [5] NOT AND
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm [6] NOT OR
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is [7] NOT AND NOT
[8] NOT OR NOT

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6] Array [6]
[0] FALSE Select the third boolean (TRUE or [44] Reset key
FALSE) input for the selected logic [45] Left key
rule. See 13-01 Start Event ([0] - [46] Right key
[61]) and 13-02 Stop Event ([70] - [47] Up key
[75]) for further description. [48] Down key
[1] TRUE [50] Comparator 4
[3] In range [60] Logic rule 4
[5] Torque limit [70]
[71]
SL Timeout 3
SL Timeout 4
6 6
[6] Current Limit
[9] Above I high [74] SL Timeout 7
[10] Out of speed range [75] Start command given
[14] Below feedb. low [79] Digital input x46/1
[15] Above feedb. high [80] Digital input x46/3
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[22] Comparator 0 Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[23] Comparator 1 or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
[24] Comparator 2 164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is
[25] Comparator 3 active, the output will be 1.
[26] Logic rule 0 [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[27] Logic rule 1 Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[28] Logic rule 2 or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
[29] Logic rule 3 166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is
[30] SL Timeout 0 active, the output will be 1.
[31] SL Timeout 1 [92] ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[32] SL Timeout 2 Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[33] Digital input DI18 or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
[34] Digital input DI19 163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is
[35] Digital input DI27 active, the output will be 1.
[36] Digital input DI29 [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[37] Digital input DI32 Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[38] Digital input DI33 or [21] Advanced ETR]. If the
[39] Start command warning 165 ATEX ETR
[40] Drive stopped freq.lim.warning is active, the
[41] Reset Trip output will be 1.
[42] Auto-reset Trip [94] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators
[43] OK key

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 13-51 SL Controller Event

Array [6] Array [20]
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See 13-1* Comparators [27] Logic rule 1
[28] Logic rule 2
[29] Logic rule 3
[30] SL Timeout 0
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See 13-1* Comparators [31] SL Timeout 1
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See 13-1* Comparators [32] SL Timeout 2

[101] RS Flipflop 7 See 13-1* Comparators [35] Digital input DI27
6 6 [36]
[37]
Digital input DI29
Digital input DI32
6.10.7 13-5* States
[39] Start command
13-51 SL Controller Event
[40] Drive stopped
Array [20]
[41] Reset Trip
Option: Function: [42] Auto-reset Trip
[0] FALSE Select the boolean input (TRUE or [43] OK key
FALSE) to define the Smart Logic [44] Reset key
Controller event. See 13-01 Start [45] Left key
Event ([0] - [61]) and 13-02 Stop [46] Right key
Event ([70] - [74]) for further [47] Up key
description.
[48] Down key
[1] TRUE [50] Comparator 4
[3] In range [60] Logic rule 4
[5] Torque limit [70] SL Timeout 3
[6] Current Limit [71] SL Timeout 4
[9] Above I high [74] SL Timeout 7
[10] Out of speed range [75] Start command given
[14] Below feedb. low [79] Digital input x46/1
[15] Above feedb. high [80] Digital input x46/3
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal
[22] Comparator 0 Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR
[23] Comparator 1 or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
[24] Comparator 2 164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is
[25] Comparator 3 active, the output will be 1.
[26] Logic rule 0

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-52 SL Controller Action

[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal If the set-up is changed, it will merge
Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR with other set-up commands coming from
or [21] Advanced ETR]. If the alarm either the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is
[4] Select set-up 3 Changes the active set-up (0-10 Active Set-
up) to ‘3’.
[92] ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal If the set-up is changed, it will merge
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm either the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
[5] Select set-up 4 Changes the active set-up (0-10 Active Set-
up) to ‘4’. 6 6
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable if 1-90 Motor Thermal If the set-up is changed, it will merge
or [21] Advanced ETR. If the either the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
warning 165 ATEX ETR
[10] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 0.
0 If the active preset reference is changed,
output will be 1.
it will merge with other preset reference
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See 13-1* Comparators it will merge with other preset reference
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See 13-1* Comparators commands coming from either the digital
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See 13-1* Comparators it will merge with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
13-52 SL Controller Action inputs or via a fieldbus.
Array [20] [13] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 3.
Option: Function: 3 If the active preset reference is changed,
[0] DISABLED Select the action corresponding to the it will merge with other preset reference
SLC event. Actions are executed when the commands coming from either the digital
corresponding event (defined in 13-51 SL inputs or via a fieldbus.
Controller Event) is evaluated as true. The [14] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 4.
following actions are available for 4 If the active preset reference is changed,
selection: it will merge with other preset reference
[0] *DISABLED commands coming from either the digital
[1] No action
[2] Select set-up 1 Changes the active set-up (0-10 Active Set- [15] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 5.
up) to ‘1’. 5 If the active preset reference is changed,
If the set-up is changed, it will merge it will merge with other preset reference
with other set-up commands coming from commands coming from either the digital
either the digital inputs or via a fieldbus. inputs or via a fieldbus.
[3] Select set-up 2 Changes the active set-up 0-10 Active Set- [16] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 6.
up) to ‘2’. 6 If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference

13-52 SL Controller Action 13-52 SL Controller Action

commands coming from either the digital [38] Set digital out A Any output with SL output A will be high.
inputs or via a fieldbus. high
[17] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 7. [39] Set digital out B Any output with SL output B will be high.
7 If the active preset reference is changed, high
it will merge with other preset reference [40] Set digital out C Any output with SL output C will be high.
commands coming from either the digital high
inputs or via a fieldbus. [41] Set digital out D Any output with SL output D will be high.
high
[18] Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1.
[42] Set digital out E Any output with SL output E will be high.
6 6 [19] Select ramp 2
[20] Select ramp 3

Selects ramp 2.
Selects ramp 3.
high
[43] Set digital out F Any output with SL output Fwill be high.
high
[21] Select ramp 4 Selects ramp 4.
[60] Reset Counter A Resets Counter A to zero.
[22] Run Issues a start command to the frequency
[61] Reset Counter B Resets Counter B to zero.
converter.
[70] Start timer 3 Start Timer 3, see 13-20 SL Controller Timer
[23] Run reverse Issues a start reverse command to the
for further description.
[24] Stop Issues a stop command to the frequency
converter.
[25] Qstop Issues a quick stop command to the
[26] Dcstop Issues a DC stop command to the
[27] Coast The frequency converter coasts
immediately. All stop commands including
the coast command stop the SLC.
[28] Freeze output Freezes the output frequency of the

[29] Start timer 0 Starts timer 0, see 13-20 SL Controller

Timer for further description.


[32] Set digital out A Any output with SL output A will be low.
low
[33] Set digital out B Any output with SL output B will be low.
low
[34] Set digital out C Any output with SL output Cwill be low.
low
[35] Set digital out D Any output with SL output D will be low.
low
[36] Set digital out E Any output with SL output E will be low.
low
[37] Set digital out F Any output with SL output F will be low.
low

6.11 Par. Group 14 - Special Functions NOTICE!

If the specified number of AUTOMATIC RESETS is reached
6.11.1 14-** Special Functions within 10 minutes, the frequency converter enters [0]
Manual reset mode. After the Manual reset is performed,
Parameter group for configuring special frequency the setting of 14-20 Reset Mode reverts to the original
converter functions. selection. If the number of AUTOMATIC RESETS is not
reached within 10 minutes, or when a Manual reset is
6.11.2 14-0* Inverter Switching performed, the internal AUTOMATIC RESET counter returns
to zero.
Parameters for configuring the inverter switching.
14-03 Overmodulation CAUTION
Option: Function: The motor may start without warning.
[0] Off Connect the overmodulation function for the output
voltage, to obtain an output voltage up to 15% Application Tip:
6 6
greater than the mains voltage. Since the default setting of the reset mode in the
[1] * On No overmodulation of the output voltage, in order to compressor drive is set up to auto-reset after 30 s this
avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft. This feature should be taken in consideration if a relay output is set to
may be useful for applications such as grinding call for a service technician in case of an alarm. By setting
machines. 5-40 Function Relay to [9] Alarm and 5-41 On Delay, Relay to
40 s the relay will only activate at either a trip lock alarm
or an alarm, which could not be auto-reset. Only the relay
6.11.3 14-1* Mains On/Off
output can be used for this; the digital outputs do not
have the On Delay feature.
Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and
handling. 14-21 Automatic Restart Time
14-12 Function at Line Imbalance Range: Function:

30 s* [0 - 600 s] Enter the time interval from trip to start of
Option: Function:
the automatic reset function. This parameter
Operation under severe line imbalance conditions
is active when 14-20 Reset Mode is set to
reduces the lifetime of the motor. Conditions are
Automatic reset.
considered severe if the motor is operated
continuously near nominal load. 14-22 Operation Mode
[0] Trip Trips the adjustable frequency drive. Option: Function:
[1] * Warning Issues a warning.
Use this parameter to specify normal operation;
[2] Disabled No action to perform tests; or to initialize all parameters
except 15-03 Power Up's, 15-04 Over Temp's and
6.11.4 14-2* Trip Reset 15-05 Over Volt's. This function is active only
when the power is cycled to the frequency
Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip converter.
handling and control card self test or initialisation. [0] Normal Normal operation of the frequency converter
* operation with the motor in the selected application.
14-20 Reset Mode
[1] Control Tests the analog and digital inputs and outputs
Option: Function: card test and the +10 V control voltage. The test requires
Select the reset function after tripping. a test connector with internal connections.
Once reset, the frequency converter
Use the following procedure for the control
can be restarted.
card test:
[0] Manual reset Performs a reset via [Reset] or via the
1. Select Control card test [1].
digital inputs.
[10] * Automatic reset Performs between one and twenty 2. Disconnect the mains supply and wait
x 10 automatic resets after tripping. for the light in the display to go out.
3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202

(A54) = ON./I.

14-22 Operation Mode 14-52 Fan Control

4. Insert the test plug (see below). Select the minimum speed of the internal fan.
5. Connect to mains supply. [0] * Auto Runs the fan only when the internal temperature
of the frequency converter is in the range 35 °C .
6. Carry out various tests.
approx. 55 °C. The fan will run at low speed at
7. The results are displayed on the LCP 35 °C, and at full speed at approx. 55 °C.
and the frequency converter moves [1] On 50%
into an infinite loop. [2] On 75%
8. 14-20 Reset Mode is automatically set [3] On 100%
to Normal operation. Carry out a
14-53 Fan Monitor
power cycle to start up in Normal
Option: Function:
6 6 operation after a control card test.
Select which reaction the frequency converter
If the test is OK: should take in case a fan fault is detected.
LCP read-out: Control Card OK. [0] Disabled
Disconnect the mains supply and remove the [1] Warning
test plug. The green LED on the Control Card [2] Trip
will light up.
If the test fails: 14-60 Function at Over Temperature
LCP read-out: Control Card I/O failure. Option: Function:
Replace the frequency converter or Control
If either heatsink or control card temperature
card. The red LED on the Control Card is turned
exceeds a factory-programmed temperature limit, a
on. Test plugs (connect the following terminals
warning will be activated. If the temperature
to each other): 18 - 27 - 32; 19 - 29 - 33; 42 -
increases further, select whether the frequency
53 - 54 1.
converter should trip (trip locked) or derate the
output current.
[0] Trip The frequency converter will trip (trip locked) and
generate an alarm. Power must be cycled to reset
the alarm, but will not allow restart of the motor
until the heat sink temperature has dropped below
the alarm limit.
Figure 6.19 [1] * Derate If the critical temperature is exceeded the output
current will be reduced until the allowable
temperature has been reached.
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload

Option: Function:
Is used in case of steady overload beyond the
thermal limits (110% for 60 sec.).
[0] Trip The frequency converter trips and provides an
alarm.
[1] * Derate Reduce pump speed to decrease the load on the
power section and allowing this to cool down.
Figure 6.20
14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current
Range: Function:
[2] initiali- Resets all parameter values to default settings,
95 %* [50 - 100 Defines the desired current level (in % of
zation except for 15-03 Power Up's, 15-04 Over Temp's
%] rated output current for the frequency
and 15-05 Over Volt's. The frequency converter
converter) when running with reduced
will reset during the next power-up.
pump speed after load on the frequency
14-20 Reset Mode will also revert to the default
converter has exceeded the allowable limit
setting [0] Normal operation.
(110% for 60 s).

14-90 Fault Level

Option: Function:
[0] Off Use this parameter to customize Fault levels. Use
[0] Off with caution as it will ignore all Warnings &
Alarms for the chosen source.
[1] Warning
[2] Trip
[3] Trip Lock
Failure Alarm Off War- Trip Trip

ning Lock
Over Current 13 D X
Motor phase
missing
30 D X
6 6
Motor phase 31 D X
missing
Motor phase 32 D X
missing
Table 6.10 Table for Selection of Choice of Action when Selected

Alarm Appears
D = Default setting. x = possible selection.
1) Only high power drives
In FC small and medium A69 is only a warning

6.12 Par. Group 15 - Drive Information 15-06 Reset kWh Counter

Option: Function:
6.12.1 15-** Drive Information
[0] Do not reset No reset of the kWh counter is desired.
Parameter group containing compressor drive information [1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to zero
such as (see 15-02 kWh Counter).
• operating data NOTICE!

The reset is carried out by pressing [OK].
• hardware configuration
• software versions 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter

Option: Function:
6.12.2 15-0* Operating data
6 6 [0] Do not reset
[1] Reset counter Select [1] Reset and press [OK] to reset the
Parameter group containing operating data, e.g. counters.
Running Hours counter to zero (see
15-00 Operating hours 15-01 Running Hours). This parameter cannot
be selected via the serial port, RS-485.
Range: Function:
Select [0] Do not reset if no reset of the
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency
Running Hours counter is desired.
converter has run. The value is saved
when the frequency converter is
15-08 Number of Starts
turned off.
Range: Function:
15-01 Running Hours [0 - 4294967295] View the total number of starts performed
since power-on. The value is cleared to zero
Range: Function:
at power-up.
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 View how many hours the motor has
h] run. Reset the counter in 15-07 Reset 15-09 Number of Auto Resets
Running Hours Counter. The value is
Range: Function:
saved when the frequency converter is
[0 - 4294967295] View the total number of auto resets
turned off.
performed since power-on. The counter is
cleared to zero at power-up.
15-02 kWh Counter
Range: Function:
0 kWh* [0 - 2147483647 Registering the power consumption
kWh] of the motor as a mean value over
one hour. Reset the counter in
15-06 Reset kWh Counter.
15-03 Power-ups
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency
converter has been powered up.
15-04 Over Temps

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter
temperature faults which have occurred.
15-05 Over Volts

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter
overvoltages which have occurred.

6.13 Parameters: 16-** Data Readouts 6.13.1 16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW]

Range: Function:
16-00 Control Word
0 kW* [0 - Displays motor power in kW. The value
Range: Function:
10000 kW] shown is calculated based on the actual
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the Control word sent from the motor voltage and motor current. The value
frequency converter via the serial communi- is filtered, and therefore approx. 30 ms may
cation port in hex code. pass from when an input value changes to
when the data readout values change. The
16-01 Reference [Unit] resolution of readout value on fieldbus is in
Range: Function: 10 W steps.
0 ReferenceFeed-
backUnit*
[-999999 - 999999
ReferenceFeed-
View the present
reference value applied 16-11 Power [hp] 6 6
backUnit] on impulse or analog Range: Function:
basis in the unit 0 hp* [0 - 10000 View the motor power in hp. The value
resulting from the hp] shown is calculated based on the actual
configuration selected motor voltage and motor current. The value
in 1-00 Configuration is filtered, and therefore approximately 30
Mode (Hz, Nm, or RPM). ms may pass from when an input value
changes to when the data readout values
16-02 Reference [%] change.
Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 View the total reference. The total 16-12 Motor voltage
%] reference is the sum of digital, analog, Range: Function:
preset, bus, and freeze references, plus 0 V* [0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value
catch-up and slow-down. used for controlling the motor.
16-03 Status Word 16-13 Frequency

0* [0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency 0 Hz* [0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency, without
converter via the serial communication port in resonance dampening.
hex code.
16-14 Motor current
16-05 Main Actual Value [%]
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 A* [0 - 10000 View the motor current measured as a mean
0 %* [-100 - 100 %] View the two-byte word sent with the A] value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and thus
status word to the Bus Master reporting approximately 30 ms may pass from when
the Main Actual Value. an input value changes to when the data
readout values change.
16-09 Custom Readout
Range: Function: 16-15 Frequency [%]
0 CustomRea- [0 - 0 Custom- View the value of custom Range: Function:
doutUnit* ReadoutUnit] readout from 0-30 Unit for 0 %* [-100 - View a two-byte word reporting the actual
User-defined Readout to 100 %] motor frequency (without resonance
0-32 Custom Readout Max dampening) as a percentage (scale 0000-4000
Value Hex) of 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Set
9-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1 to send it
with the status word instead of the MAV.

16-16 Torque [Nm] 16-25 Torque [Nm] High

0 Nm* [-3000 - View the torque value with sign, applied to 0 Nm* [-200000000 - View the torque value with sign,
3000 the motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between 200000000 Nm] applied to the motor shaft. Some
Nm] 160% motor current and torque in relation to motors supply more than 160% torque.
the rated torque. Some motors supply more Consequently, the min. value and the
than 160% torque. Consequently, the min. max. value depend on the max. motor
value and the max. value depend on the max. current as well as the motor used. This
motor current as well as the motor used. The specific readout has been adapted to be
value is filtered, and thus approx. 30 ms may able to show higher values than the
pass from when an input changes value to standard readout in 16-16 Torque [Nm].
when the data readout values change.
6 6 16-17 Speed [RPM] 6.13.2 16-3* Drive Status

Range: Function:
16-30 DC Link Voltage
0 RPM* [-30000 - View the actual motor RPM. In open
30000 RPM] loop or closed loop process control, the Range: Function:
motor RPM is estimated. In speed 0 V* [0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered
closed loop modes the motor RPM is with a 30 ms time constant.
measured.
16-32 Brake Energy /s
16-18 Motor Thermal Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the calculated thermal load on the external brake resistor, stated as an
motor. The cut-out limit is 100%. The basis instantaneous value.
for calculation is the ETR function selected in
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. 16-33 Brake Energy /2 min
Range: Function:
16-19 KTY sensor temperature 0 kW* [0 - 10000 View the brake power transmitted to an
Range: Function: kW] external brake resistor. The mean power
0 °C* [0 - 0 °C] Returning the actual temperature on KTY is calculated on an average basis for the
sensor built into the motor. most recent 120 s.
See parameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature.
16-34 Heatsink Temp.
16-20 Motor Angle Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 °C* [0 - 255 °C] View the frequency converter heatsink
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the current encoder/resolver angle offset temperature. The cut-out limit is 90 ±5 °C,
relative to the index position. The value range and the motor cuts back in at 60 ±5 °C.
of 0-65535 corresponds to 0-2*pi (radians).
16-35 Inverter Thermal
16-21 Torque [%] High Res. Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the percentage load on the inverter.
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] The value shown is the torque in percent
of nominal torque, with sign and 0.1% 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current
resolution, applied to the motor shaft. Range: Function:
Size related* [0.01 - View the inverter nominal current,
16-22 Torque [%] 10000 A] which must match the nameplate
Range: Function: data on the connected motor. The
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Value shown is the torque in percent of data are used for calculation of
nominal torque, with sign, applied to the torque, motor protection, etc.
motor shaft.

16-37 Inv. Max. Current 16-52 Feedback [Unit]

Size related* [0.01 - View the inverter maximum current, 0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - View the feedback unit
10000 A] which must match the nameplate backUnit* 999999.999 resulting from the
data on the connected motor. The ReferenceFeed- selection of unit and
data are used for calculation of backUnit] scaling in 3-00 Reference
torque, motor protection, etc. Range, 3-01 Reference/
Feedback Unit,
16-38 SL Controller State 3-02 Minimum Reference
Range: Function: and 3-03 Maximum
Reference.
0* [0 - 100 ] View the state of the event under execution by
the SL controller.
16-53 Digi Pot Reference
16-39 Control Card Temp. Range: Function: 6 6
Range: Function: 0* [-200 - 200 ] View the contribution of the Digital Potenti-
ometer to the actual reference.
0 °C* [0 - 100 °C] View the temperature on the control card,
stated in °C
16-57 Feedback [RPM]
16-40 Logging Buffer Full Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0 RPM* [-30000 - Readout parameter where the actual
30000 RPM] motor RPM from the feedback source
View whether the logging buffer is full (see parameter
can be read in both closed loop and
group 15-1* Data Log Settings). The logging buffer is
open loop. Select the feedback source in
never full when setting 15-13 Logging Mode to [0] Log
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source.
always.
[0] No
[1] Yes
16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 This parameter specifies the
RPM] reference given to the frequency
converter after the speed ramp.
6.13.3 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference

Range: Function:
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the total reference, the sum of digital,
analog, preset, bus and freeze references, plus
catch-up and slow-down.
16-51 Pulse Reference

Range: Function:
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the reference value from programmed
digital input(s). The readout can also reflect
the impulses from an incremental encoder.

6.13.4 16-6* Inputs and Outputs 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting

Option: Function:
16-60 Digital Input [1] Voltage
Range: Function:
16-64 Analog Input 54
0 [0 - View the signal states from the active digital inputs.
* 1023 ] Example: Input 18 corresponds to bit no. 5, ‘0’ = no Range: Function:
signal, ‘1’ = connected signal. Bit 6 works in the 0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 54.
opposite way, on = '0', off = '1' (safe stop input).
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
Bit 0 Digital input term. 33
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The
value shown reflects the selection in 6-50 Terminal
6 6
42 Output.
Bit 5 Digital input term. 18 16-66 Digital Output [bin]
Range: Function:
Bit 7 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4
0* [0 - 15 ] View the binary value of all digital outputs.
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]
Range: Function:
Table 6.11 Active Digital Inputs 0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal
29.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00
130BA894.10
DI T -33
DI T -32
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
DI T -29
DI T -27 Range: Function:
DI T -19
DI T -18
0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual value of the frequency
DI T -37 applied at terminal 33 as an impulse input.
DI X30/4
DI X30/3
DI X30/2
DI X46/13
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
DI X46/11
DI X46/9 Range: Function:
DI X46/7
DI X46/5 0* [0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses applied to
DI X46/3
DI X46/1 terminal 27 in digital output mode.
Figure 6.21 Relay Settings
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses at terminal 29
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting in digital output mode.
Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 53.
[0] Current
[1] Voltage
16-62 Analog Input 53

Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 53.
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting

Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 54.
[0] Current

16-71 Relay Output [bin] 16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1

0* [0 - 511 ] View the settings of all relays. option installed and the control word profile
selected in 8-10 Control Profile.
For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1

Range: Function:
0* [-200 - View the two-byte word sent with the control
200 ] word from the Bus-Master to set the
reference value.
Figure 6.23 Relay Settings

For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.
6 6
16-84 Comm. Option Status
16-72 Counter A Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 65535 ] View the extended fieldbus comm. option
0* [-2147483648 - View the present value of Counter A. status word.
2147483647 ] Counters are useful as comparator For more information, refer to the relevant
operands, see 13-10 Comparator Operand. fieldbus manual.
The value can be reset or changed either
via digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* 16-86 FC Port REF 1
Digital Inputs) or by using an SLC action Range: Function:
(13-52 SL Controller Action). 0* [-200 - View the two-byte status word (STW) sent to
200 ] the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the status
16-73 Counter B word depends on the fieldbus option installed
Range: Function: and the control word profile selected in
0* [-2147483648 - View the present value of Counter B. 8-10 Control Profile.
2147483647 ] Counters are useful as comparator
operands (13-10 Comparator Operand). 16-86 FC Port REF 1
The value can be reset or changed either Range: Function:
via digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* 0* [-200 - View the two-byte status word (STW) sent to
Digital Inputs) or by using an SLC action 200 ] the bus master. Interpretation of the status
(13-52 SL Controller Action). word depends on the serial communication
bus option installed and the control word
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter profile selected in 8-10 Control Profile.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] Returns the actual counter value of
6.13.6 16-9* Diagnosis Read-Outs
precise counter (1-84 Precise Stop
Counter Value).
NOTICE!
When using MCT 10 Set-up Software, the readout
6.13.5 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port parameters can only be read online, i.e. as the actual
status. This means that the status is not stored in the MCT
Parameters for reporting the BUS references and control 10 Set-up Software file.
words.
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 16-90 Alarm Word

0* [0 - 65535 ] View the two-byte control word (CTW) 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial
received from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of communication port in hex code.
the control word depends on the fieldbus

16-91 Alarm Word 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial
communication port in hex code.
16-92 Warning Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the
serial communication port in hex code.
16-93 Warning Word 2

Range: Function:
6 6 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the
serial communication port in hex code.
16-94 Ext. Status Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended warning word sent
via the serial communication port in hex
code.
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended warning word 2
sent via the serial communication port
in hex code.

6.14 Par. Group 25 - Cascade Controller To configure the Cascade Controller to the actual system
and the desired control strategy, it is recommended to
Parameters for configuring the Basic Cascade Controller for follow the below sequence, starting with parameter group
sequence control of multiple compressors. 25-0* System Settings, and next parameter group 25-5*
Alternation Settings.These parameters can normally be set
in advance.
Parameters in parameter group 25-2* Bandwidth Settings
and 25-4* Staging settings will often be dependent on the
dynamic of the system and final adjustment to be done at
the commissioning of the plant.
NOTICE!
The Cascade Controller is supposed to operate in closed
loop controlled by the built-in PI controller ([1] Speed 6 6
Closed Loop selected in 1-00 Configuration Mode). If [0]
Speed Open Loop is selected in 1-00 Configuration Mode, all
fixed speed compressors will be destaged, but the variable
speed compressor will still be controlled by the frequency
converter, now as an open loop configuration:
Figure 6.24 Cascade Controller Feedback Signals

6 6
Figure 6.25 Configuring the Cascade Controller

6.14.1 25-0* System Settings 25-05 Fixed Lead Compressor

Option: Function:
Parameters related to control principles and configuration Fixed Lead Compressor means that the variable speed
of the system. compressor is connected directly to the frequency
25-00 Cascade Controller converter and if a contactor is applied between
frequency converter and compressor, this contactor
Option: Function:
will not be controlled by the frequency converter.
For operation of multiple devices (compressor)
[0] No The lead compressor function can alternate between
systems where capacity is adapted to actual load
the compressors controlled by the two built in relays.
by means of speed control combined with on/off
One compressor must be connected to the built-in
control of the devices. For simplicity only
RELAY 1, and the other compressor to RELAY 2. The
compressor systems are described.
compressor function (Cascade Compressor1 and
[0] * Disabled The Cascade Controller is not active. All built-in
Cascade Compressor2) will automatically be assigned
relays assigned to compressor motors in the
cascade function will be de-energized. If a
to the relays (maximum two compressors can in this 6 6
case be controlled from the frequency converter).
variable speed compressor is connected to the
[1] * Yes The lead compressor will be fixed (no alternation) and
frequency converter directly (not controlled by a
connected directly to the frequency converter. The
built-in relay), this compressor will be controlled
25-50 Lead Compressor Alternation is automatically set
as a single compressor system.
to [0] Off. Built-in relays Relay 1 and Relay 2 can be
[1] Enabled The Cascade Controller is active and will stage/
assigned to separate fixed speed compressors. In total
destage compressors according to load on the
three compressors can be controlled by the frequency
system.
converter.
NOTICE! 25-06 Number of Compressors
This parameter can only be [1] Enabled, if 22-75 Short Cycle
Option: Function:
Protection is set to [0] Disabled.
The number of compressors connected to
the Cascade Controller including the
25-02 Motor Start
variable speed compressor. If the variable
Option: Function: speed compressor is connected directly to
Motors are connected to the mains directly with the frequency converter and the other fixed
a contactor or with a soft starter. When the speed compressors (lag compressors) are
value of 25-02 Motor Start is set to an option controlled by the two built in relays, three
other than [0] Direct on Line, then 25-50 Lead compressors can be controlled. If both the
Compressor Alternation is automatically set to variable speed and fixed speed compressors
the default of [0] Direct on Line. are to be controlled by built-in relays, only
[0] * Direct on Each fixed speed compressor is connected to two compressors can be connected.
Line line directly via a contactor. [0] 2 If 25-05 Fixed Lead Compressor is set to [0]
[1] Soft Each fixed speed compressor is connected to * compressors No: one variable speed compressor and one
starter line via a soft starter. fixed speed compressor; both controlled by
built in relay. If 25-05 Fixed Lead Compressor
25-04 Compressor Cycling is set to [1] Yes: one variable speed
Option: Function: compressor and one fixed speed
To provide equal hours of operation with fixed compressor controlled by built-in relay
speed compressors, the compressor use can be [1] 3 [1] 3 Compressors: One lead compressor, see
cycled. The selection of compressor cycling is compressors 25-05 Fixed Lead Compressor. Two fixed
either “first in – last out” or equal running hours speed compressors controlled by built-in
for each compressor. relays.
[0] * Disabled The fixed speed compressors will be connected in
the order 1 – 2 – 3 and disconnected in the 6.14.2 25-2* Bandwidth Manager
order 3 – 2 – 1. (First in – last out)
[1] Enabled The fixed speed compressors will be connected/ Parameters for setting the bandwidth within which the
disconnected to have equal running hours for pressure/temperature will be allowed to operate before
each compressor. staging/destaging fixed speed compressors. Also includes
various timers to stabilize the control.

25-20 Staging Bandwidth [%] 25-21 Override Bandwidth [%]

10%* [1 - Set the staging bandwidth (SBW) percentage to
100 accommodate normal system pressure fluctuation.
%] In cascade control systems, to avoid frequent
switching of fixed speed compressors, the desired
system pressure is typically kept within a
bandwidth rather than at a constant level.
The SBW is programmed as a percentage of the
numerically larger value of 3-03 Maximum Reference
and 3-02 Minimum Reference. For example, if
3-03 Maximum Reference is 10 bar and the SBW is
set at 10%, a system pressure between 4.0 and 6.0
6 6 bar is tolerated if the setpoint is 5 bar. No staging
or destaging will occur within this bandwidth. Figure 6.27 Override Bandwidth
Setting the OBW too close to the SBW could

defeat the purpose with frequent staging at
momentary pressure changes. Setting the
OBW too high might lead to unacceptably
high or low pressure in the system while the
Figure 6.26 Staging Bandwidth SBW timers are running. The value can be
optimized with increased familiarity with the
system. See 25-25 OBW Time.
To avoid unintended staging during the
25-21 Override Bandwidth [%] commissioning phase and fine tuning of the
Range: Function: controller, initially leave the OBW at the
100% = [1 – When a large and quick change in the factory setting of 100% (Off). When the fine
Disabled* 100%] system demand occurs, the system pressure tuning is completed, the OBW should be set
rapidly changes and an immediate staging to the desired value. An initial value of 10%
or destaging of a fixed speed compressor is suggested.
becomes necessary to match the 25-22 Fixed Speed Bandwidth [%]
requirement. The override bandwidth (OBW)
Range: Function:
is programmed to override the staging/
destaging timer (25-23 SBW Staging Delay/ 10%* [1 - When the cascade control system is running
25-24 SBW Destaging Delay) for immediate 100%] normally and the frequency converter issues a
response. trip alarm, it is important to maintain the
The OBW must always be programmed to a system head. The Cascade Controller does this
higher value than the value set in by continuing to stage/destage the fixed speed
25-20 Staging Bandwidth (SBW). The OBW is compressor on and off. Due to the fact that
a percentage of 3-03 Maximum Reference. keeping the head at the setpoint would require
frequent staging and destaging when only a
fixed speed compressor is running, a wider
Fixed Speed Bandwidth (FSBW) is used instead
of SBW. It is possible to stop the fixed speed
compressors, in case of an alarm situation, by
pressing the [Off] or [Hand On] or if the signal
programmed for Start on digital input goes low.
In case the issued alarm is a trip-lock alarm then

the Cascade Controller must stop the system
immediately by cutting out all the fixed speed
compressors. This is basically the same as

25-22 Fixed Speed Bandwidth [%] 25-25 OBW Time

Emergency Stop (Coast/Coast inverse Command) 60 [0 – Staging a fixed speed compressor creates a
for the Cascade Controller. sec.* 300 momentary pressure peak in the system, which
sec. ] might exceed the Override Bandwidth (OBW). It
25-23 SBW Staging Delay
is not desirable to destage a compressor in
Range: Function: response to a staging pressure peak. The OBW
60 [0-3000 Immediate staging of a fixed speed Time can be programmed to prevent staging
sec.* sec.] compressor is not desirable when a until the system pressure has stabilized and
momentary pressure drop in the system normal control established. Set the timer to a
exceeds the Staging Bandwidth (SBW). value that allows the system to stabilize after
Staging is delayed by the length of time staging. The 10 second factory setting is
programmed. If the pressure increases to appropriate in most applications. In highly
within the SBW before the timer has dynamic systems, a shorter time may be 6 6
elapsed, the timer is reset. desirable.
130BA370.11
175ZA672.12
OBW (27-71)
SBW (27-20)
SBW (27-70)
Actual head
Setpoint
Setpoint
SBW (27-70)
SBW (27-20)
OBW (27-71)
OBW timer (27-25)
SBW staging-vertr. (27-23) Figure 6.30 OBW Time

Figure 6.28 SBW Staging Delay
25-27 Stage Function

25-24 SBW Destaging Delay Option: Function:
Range: Function: [0] * Disabled
60 [0-3000 Immediate destaging of a fixed speed [1] Enabled If the Stage Function is set to [0] Disabled,
sec.* sec.] compressor is not desirable when a 25-28 Stage Function Time will not be activated.
momentary pressure increase in the system
25-28 Stage Function Time
that exceeds the Staging Bandwidth (SBW).
Destaging is delayed by the length of time Range: Function:
programmed. If the pressure decreases to 10 [0 – The Stage Function Time is programmed to
within the SBW before the timer has sec.* 300 avoid frequent staging of the fixed speed
elapsed, the timer is reset. sec.] compressors. The Stage Function Time starts if it
is [1] Enabled by 25-27 Stage Function and when
175ZA671.11
the variable speed compressor is running at

(27-24) SBW destage delay 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or 4-14 Motor
Speed High Limit [Hz] (or at 4-11 Motor Speed
Low Limit [RPM] or 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
SBW
(27-20) [Hz] if 7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control is
Setpoint programmed to Inverse), with at least one fixed
speed compressor in the stop position. When
SBW
(27-20) the programmed value of the timer expires, a
fixed speed compressor is staged.
25-29 Destage Function

Figure 6.29 SBW Destaging Delay
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled

25-29 Destage Function 25-41 Ramp Up Delay

[1] Enabled The Destage Function ensures that the lowest 10 [0 – When removing a fixed speed compressor
numbers of compressors are running to save sec.* 120 controlled by a soft starter, it is possible to
energy. If the Destage Function is set to [0] sec.] delay the ramp up of the lead compressor until
Disabled, the 25-30 Destage Function Time will not a preset time after the stopping of the fixed
be activated. speed compressor to eliminate pressure surges
in the system.
25-30 Destage Function Time Only to be used if [1] Soft Starter is selected in
Range: Function: 25-02 Motor Start.
10 [0 – The Destage Function Timer is programmable to
sec.* 300 avoid frequent staging/destaging of the fixed
sec. ] speed compressors. The Destage Function Time
6 6 starts when the adjustable speed compressor is
running at 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] (or at 4-13 Motor
Speed High Limit [RPM] or 4-14 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz] if 7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse
Figure 6.32 Ramp-up Delay
Control is programmed to Inverse), with one or
more fixed speed compressors in operation and
system requirements satisfied. In this situation,
the adjustable speed compressor contributes 25-42 Staging Threshold
little to the system. When the programmed value
Range: Function:
of the timer expires, a stage is removed.
90%* [0 – When adding a fixed speed compressor, in order
175ZA640.11
100%] to prevent an overshoot of pressure, the variable

F VLT pump
Pump speed compressor ramps down to a lower speed.
switch-off
When the variable speed compressor reaches the
“Staging Speed” the fixed speed compressor is
Fmin
(4-12) staged on. The Staging Threshold is used to
calculate the speed of the variable speed
De-stage compressor when the “cut-in point” of the fixed
timer period
(27-27) speed compressor occurs. The calculation of the
Figure 6.31 Destage Function Time Staging Threshold is the ratio of 4-11 Motor Speed
Low Limit [RPM] or 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
[Hz] to 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] expressed in
6.14.3 25-4* Staging Settings percent.
Staging Threshold must range from
η LOW
Parameters determining conditions for staging/destaging ηSTAGE % =
η
× 100 %
HIGH
the compressors.
to 100%, where nLOW is Motor Speed Low Limit
25-40 Ramp Down Delay and nHIGH is Motor Speed High Limit.
Range: Function:
10 sec.* [0 – 120 When adding a fixed speed compressor
sec. ] controlled by a soft starter, it is possible to
delay the ramp down of the lead
compressor until a preset time after the start
of the fixed speed compressor to eliminate
pressure surges in the system. Figure 6.33 Staging Threshold
Only to be used if [1] Soft Starter is selected
in 25-02 Motor Start.

25-43 Destaging Threshold 25-45 Staging Speed [Hz]

50%* [0 – When removing a fixed speed compressor, in the “Staging Speed” the fixed speed compressor is
100%] order to prevent an undershoot of pressure, the staged on. Staging Speed calculation is based on
variable speed compressor ramps up to a higher 25-42 Staging Threshold and 4-14 Motor Speed High
speed. When the variable speed compressor Limit [Hz].
reaches the “Destaging Speed” the fixed speed Staging Speed is calculated with the following
compressor is destaged. The Destaging Threshold formula:
is used to calculate the speed of the variable ηSTAGE %
ηSTAGE = η HIGH
100
where nHIGH is Motor Speed
speed compressor when the destaging of the
High Limit and nSTAGE100% is the value of Staging
fixed speed compressor occurs. The calculation of
the Destaging Threshold is the ratio of 4-11 Motor Threshold.
Speed Low Limit [RPM] or 4-12 Motor Speed Low
Limit [Hz] to 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or
25-46 Destaging Speed [RPM]
Option: Function:
6 6
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] expressed in
percent. 0 N/A Readout of the below calculated value for Destaging
Destaging Threshold must range from Speed. When removing a fixed speed compressor, in
η LOW order to prevent an undershoot of pressure, the
ηSTAGE % = × 100 %
η
HIGH variable speed compressor ramps up to a higher
to 100%, where nLOW is Motor Speed Low Limit speed. When the variable speed compressor reaches
and nHIGH is Motor Speed High Limit. the “Destaging Speed” the fixed speed compressor is
destaged. Destaging Speed is calculated based on
25-43 De-staging Threshold and 4-13 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM].
Destaging Speed is calculated with the following
formula:
η DESTAGE %
Figure 6.34 Destaging Threshold η DESTAGE = η HIGH where nHIGH is Motor
100
Speed High Limit and nDESTAGE100% is the value of
Destaging Threshold.
25-44 Staging Speed [RPM]
25-47 Destaging Speed [Hz]
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
0 N/A Readout of the below calculated value for Staging
Readout of the below calculated value for Destaging
Speed. When adding a fixed speed compressor, in
Speed. When removing a fixed speed compressor, in
order to prevent an overshoot of pressure, the
order to prevent an undershoot of pressure, the variable
variable speed compressor ramps down to a lower
speed compressor ramps up to a higher speed. When
speed. When the variable speed compressor reaches
the variable speed compressor reaches the “Destaging
the “Staging Speed” the fixed speed compressor is
Speed” the fixed speed compressor is destaged.
staged on. Staging Speed calculation is based on
Destaging Speed is calculated based on 25-43 De-
25-42 Staging Threshold and 4-13 Motor Speed High
staging Threshold and 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
Limit [RPM].
Destaging Speed is calculated with the following
Staging Speed is calculated with the following
formula:
formula: η DESTAGE %
ηSTAGE % η DESTAGE = η HIGH
100
ηSTAGE = η HIGH
100
where nHIGH is Motor Speed High Limit and nDESTAGE100%
where nHIGH is Motor Speed High Limit and nSTAGE100%
is the value of Destaging Threshold.
is the value of Staging Threshold.
25-45 Staging Speed [Hz]

Option: Function:
0 N/A Readout of the below calculated value for Staging
Speed When adding a fixed speed compressor, in
order to prevent an overshoot of pressure, the
variable speed compressor ramps down to a lower
speed. When the variable speed compressor reaches

25-47 Destaging Speed [Hz] 25-51 Alternation Event

This parameter is only active if the options
[2] At Command or [3] At Staging or
Command have been selected in 25-50 Lead
Compressor Alternation. If an Alternation
Event is selected, the alternation of lead
compressor takes place every time the event
occurs.
[0] * External Takes place when a signal is applied to one
of the digital inputs on the terminal strip
and this input has been assigned to [121]
Lead Compressor Alternation in parameter
6 6 Figure 6.35 Destaging Speed
group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
[1] Alternation Takes place every time 25-52 Alternation Time
Time Interval Interval expires.
25-52 Alternation Time Interval

6.14.4 25-5* Alternation Settings Range: Function:
24 h* [1 – 999 If [1] Alternation Time Interval option in
Parameters for defining the conditions for alternation of h] 25-51 Alternation Event is selected, the
the variable speed compressor (lead), if selected as part of alternation of the variable speed compressor
the control strategy. takes place every time the Alternation Time
Interval expires (can be checked out in
25-50 Lead Compressor Alternation 25-53 Alternation Timer Value).
Option: Function:
25-53 Alternation Time Value
Lead compressor alternation equalizes the
use of compressors by periodically changing Option: Function:
the compressor that is speed controlled. This 0 N/A Readout parameter for the Alternation Time Interval
ensures that compressors are equally used value set in 25-52 Alternation Time Interval.
over time. Alternation equalizes the usage of
compressors by always choosing the
25-55 Alternation if Capacity < 50%
compressor with the lowest number of used Option: Function:
hours to stage on next. [0] Disabled
[0] * Off No alternation of lead compressor function [1] * Enabled If Alternation If Capacity <50% is enabled, the
will take place. It is not possible to set this compressor alternation can only occur if the
parameter to options other than [0] Off if capacity is equal to or below 50%. The capacity
25-02 Motor Start is set other than [0] Direct calculation is the ratio of running compressors
on Line. (including the variable speed compressor) to the
NOTICE! total number of available compressors (including
It is not possible to select other than [0] variable speed compressor, but not those
Off if 25-05 Fixed Lead Compressor is set interlocked).
N Running
to [1] Yes. Capacity =
N Total
× 100 %
[1] At Staging Alternation of the lead compressor function For the Basic Cascade Controller all compressors
will take place when staging another are equal size.
compressor. Disabled [0]: The lead compressor alternation will
[2] At Alternation of the lead compressor function take place at any compressor capacity.
Command will take place at an external command Enabled [1]: The lead compressor function will be
signal or a pre-programmed event. See alternated only if the numbers of compressors
25-51 Alternation Event for available options. running are providing less than 50% of total
[3] At Staging Alternation of the variable speed (lead) compressor capacity.
or at compressor will take place at staging or the Only valid if 25-50 Lead Compressor Alternation is
Command “At Command” signal (See above). different from [0] Off.

25-56 Staging Mode at Alternation

Option: Function:
This parameter is only active if the option selected
in 25-50 Lead Compressor Alternation is different from
[0] Off.
Two types of staging and destaging of compressors
are possible. Slow transfer makes staging and
destaging smooth. Quick Transfer makes staging and
destaging as fast as possible; the variable speed
compressor is just cut out (coasted).
[0] * Slow At alternation, the variable speed compressor is
ramped up to maximum speed and then ramped
down to a standstill.
[1] Quick At alternation, the variable speed compressor is 6 6
ramped up to maximum speed and then coasted to
standstill.
Figure 6.36 is an example of the Slow transfer staging. The

variable speed compressor (top graph) and one fixed
speed compressor (bottom graph) are running before the
staging command. When the [0] Slow transfer command is
activated, an alternation is carried out by ramping the
variable speed compressor to 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit Figure 6.36 Slow Transfer Staging
[RPM] or 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz], and then
decelerated to zero speed. After a “Delay Before Starting
Next Compressor” (25-58 Run Next Compressor Delay) the 25-58 Run Next Compressor Delay
next lead compressor (middle graph) is accelerated and Range: Function:
another original lead compressor (top graph) is added after
0.5 [25-58 Run Next This parameter is only active if the
the “Delay Before Running On Mains” (25-59 Run on Mains
sec* Compressor option selected in 25-50 Lead
Delay) as a fixed speed compressor. The next lead
Delay – 5.0 sec] Compressor Alternation, is different
compressor (middle graph) is decelerated to Motor Speed
from [0] Off.
Low Limit and then allowed to vary speed to maintain
This parameter sets the time between
system pressure.
stopping the old variable speed
compressor and starting another
compressor as a new variable speed
compressor. Refer to 25-56 Staging
Mode at Alternation and Figure 6.36 for
description of staging and alternation.
25-59 Run on Mains Delay

Range: Function:
0.5 [25-58 Run Next This parameter is only active if the
sec* Compressor option selected in 25-50 Lead
Delay – 5.0 sec ] Compressor Alternation, is different
from [0] Off.
This parameter sets the time between
stopping the old variable speed
compressor and starting this
compressor as a new fixed speed
compressor. Refer to 25-56 Staging
Mode at Alternation and Figure 6.36 for
description of staging and alternation.

6.14.5 25-8* Status 25-81 Compressor Status

Option: Function:
Readout parameters informing about the operating status input programmed for Compressor (number
of the cascade controller and the compressors controlled. on compressor) Interlock in parameter group
25-80 Pack Status 5-1* Digital Inputs. Can only refer to fixed
speed compressors.
Option: Function:
[O] Off Stopped by the cascade controller (but not
Read out of the status of the Pack Controller.
interlocked).
Disabled Pack Controller is disabled (25-00 Cascade
[D] Running on Variable speed compressor, regardless if
Controller).
Frequency connected directly or controlled via relay in
Emergency All compressors have been stopped by means
Converter the frequency converter.
of a Coast/Coast inverse or an External Interlock
[R] Running on Running on mains. Fixed speed compressor
command applied to the frequency converter.
6 6
Mains running.
Off All compressors have been stopped by means
of a Stop command applied to the frequency 25-82 Lead Compressor
converter. Option: Function:
In Open Loop 1-00 Configuration Mode has been set for [0]
0 N/A Readout parameter for the actual variable speed
Open Loop. All fixed speed compressors are
compressor in the system. It is updated to reflect the
stopped. The variable speed compressor will
current variable speed compressor in the system when
continue to run.
an alternation takes place. If no lead compressor is
Frozen Staging/destaging of compressors has been selected (Cascade Controller disabled or all
locked and reference locked. compressors interlocked) the display will show NONE.
Jogging All fixed speed compressors are stopped. When
stopped, the variable speed compressor will run 25-83 Relay Status
at jog speed. Array [2]
Running A Start command is applied to the frequency
converter and the Pack controller is controlling On
the compressors. Off Read out of the status for each of the relays assigned to
Running FSBW The frequency converter is tripped off and the control the compressors. Every element in the array
Pack Controller is controlling the fixed speed represents a relay. If a relay is activated, the corresponding
compressors based on 4-14 Motor Speed High element is set to “On”. If a relay is deactivated, the
Limit [Hz]. corresponding element is set to “Off”.
Staging The Pack Controller is staging fixed speed 25-84 Compressor ON Time
compressors.
Array [2]
Destaging The Pack Controller is destaging fixed speed
compressors. 0 [0 – Readout of the value for Compressor ON
Lead Not Set No compressor available to be assigned as h* 2147483647 Time. The Cascade Controller has sete
variable speed compressor. h] counters for the compressors and for the
relays that control the compressors.
25-81 Compressor Status Compressor ON Time monitors the
Option: Function: “operating hours” of each compressor. The
Compressor Status shows the status for the value of each Compressor ON Time counter
number of compressors selected in can be reset to 0 by writing in the
25-06 Number Of Pumps. It is a readout of the parameter, e.g. if the compressor is replaced
status for each of the compressors showing a in case of service.
string, which consists of compressor number
25-85 Relay ON Time
and the current status of the compressor.
Example: Readout is with the abbreviation like Array [2]
“1:D 2:O” This means that compressor 1 is
0 [0 – Readout of the value for Relay ON time. The
running and speed controlled by the
h* 2147483647 Cascade Controller has set counters for the
frequency converter and compressor 2 is
h] compressors and for the relays that control
stopped.
the compressors. Compressor cycling is
[X] Disabled The compressor is interlocked either via
always done based on the relay counters,
25-90 Pump Interlock, or signal on a digital

otherwise it would always use the new 25-91 Manual Alternation

compressor if a compressor is replaced and
Option: Function:
its value in 25-84 Pump ON Time counter is
compressor, the parameter will be reset to
reset. In order to use 25-04 Pump Cycling, the
[0] immediately after.
Cascade Controller is monitoring the Relay
ON time.
25-86 Reset Relay Counters

Option: Function:
[0] * Do not reset
[1] Do reset Resets all elements in 25-85 Relay ON Time.
6.14.6 25-9* Service

6 6
Parameters used in case of service on one or more of the
compressors controlled.
25-90 Compressor Interlock
Array [2]
In this parameter, it is possible to disable one or more

of the fixed lead compressors. For example, the
compressor will not be selected for staging on even if
it is the next compressor in the operation sequence. It
is not possible to disable the lead compressor with the
Compressor Interlock command.
The digital input interlocks are selected as [130 – 132]
Compressor 1-3 Interlock in parameter group 5-1* Digital
Inputs.
[0] Off The compressor is active for staging/destaging.
*
[1] On The Compressor Interlock command is given. If a
compressor is running it is immediately destaged. If the
compressor is not running it is not allowed to stage on.
25-91 Manual Alternation

Option: Function:
[0] 0 = Off - This parameter is only active if the options
* Number of At Command or At Stating or Command are
Compressors selected in 25-50 Lead Compressor
Alternation.
The parameter is for manually setting of
what compressor to be assigned as
variable speed compressor. The default
value of Manual Alternation is [0] Off. If a
value other than [0] Off is set, the
alternation is carried out immediately and
the compressor that is selected with
Manual Alternation is the new variable
speed compressor. After the alternation has
been carried out, the Manual Alternation
parameter is reset to [0] Off. If the
parameter is set to the number which
equals the actual variable speed

6.15 Par. Group 28 - Compressor Functions 6.15.2 28-1* Oil Return Management
6.15.1 28-0* Short Cycle Protection Insufficient lubrication can be the result of oil depositing
itself in pipes and bends. Return oil deposits to the
When controlling refrigeration compressors, there is often crankcase by increasing velocity for short periods at
a need for limiting the numbers of starts. One way to limit regular time intervals or by ensuring adequate oil return
the starts is to ensure a minimum run time (time between when velocity is too low.
a start and a stop) and a minimum interval between starts.
28-02 Minimum Run Time can override any normal stop With Oil Return Management, these two oil return
command and 28-01 Interval between Starts can override mechanisms can be programmed into the Compressor
any normal start command (Start/Jog/Freeze). Drive™. With Oil Return Management enabled, the
None of the two functions are active if Hand On or Off frequency converter performs oil return by boosting the
modes have been activated via the LCP. If selecting Hand compressor speed to 4200 RPM (70 Hz) for a selectable
6 6 On or Off, the two timers will be reset to 0, and not start
counting until Auto is pressed and an active start
duration. Programme the duration in 28-13 Boost Duration.
The boosts are performed at fixed time intervals
command applied. (programmed in 28-12 Fixed Boost Interval) or if the
28-00 Short Cycle Protection compressor speed has been less than 3000 RPM (50 Hz) for
too long (as programmed in 28-11 Low Speed Running
Option: Function:
Time), whichever occurs first. Thus, the maximum time
[0] Disabled Timer set in 28-01 Interval between Starts is
between two consecutive oil return boosts is as
disabled.
programmed in 28-12 Fixed Boost Interval. A text message
[1] * Enabled Timer set in 28-01 Interval between Starts is
on the LCP indicates oil return boosts.
enabled.
NOTICE! NOTICE!
This parameter can only be [1] Enabled if 25-00 Cascade If 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or 4-14 Motor Speed
Controller is set to [0] Disabled. High Limit [Hz] is set to the boost speed 4200 RPM an oil
boost may cause unwanted staging or destaging if
28-01 Interval Between Starts parameter group 25-** Cascade Controller is active.
Range: Function:
28-10 Oil Return Management
300 s* [0 - 3600 s] Sets the time desired as minimum time
between two starts. Any normal start Option: Function:
command (Start/Jog/Freeze) is disregarded [0] * Off No function
until the timer has expired. [1] On Oil return mechanism is active.
28-02 Minimum Run Time 28-11 Low Speed Running Time

12 s* [0 - par. Sets the time desired as minimum run time 60 min* [1 – Running at low speeds for extended periods
28-01] after a normal start command (Start/Jog/ 1440 may result in inadequate oil return to the
Freeze). Any normal stop command is min] compressor crankcase. Set this parameter to
disregarded until the set time has expired. the maximum running time the compressor
The timer starts counting following a normal is allowed to run at a speed below 3000
start command (Start/Jog/Freeze). RPM/50 Hz. An oil return boost is performed
A Coast (Inverse) or an External Interlock each time the compressor has been running
command override the timer. at a low speed for this maximum time.
NOTICE! 28-12 Fixed Boost Interval

Does not work in cascade mode. Range: Function:
24 h * [1 – An oil return boost is performed at fixed time
168 h] intervals to complement the oil return boosts
triggered by inadequate flow speeds
(28-11 Low Speed Running Time). The fixed
interval boosts ensure that oil return boosts
are performed even when no boosts have

28-12 Fixed Boost Interval Discharge temperatures in the range from warning level to
Range: Function: emergency level trigger a warning and an action set by
parameter par. 28-25 Warning Action. The action can be
occurred due to low flow speed (28-11 Low
None or Decrease cooling. If the action is set to Decrease
Speed Running Time).
cooling, cooling is decreased as a preventive action in an
28-13 Boost Duration attempt to lower the discharge temperature.
Range: Function:
30 s * [10 – 120 s ] This parameter controls the duration of oil Cooling is decreased by step-wise lowering of the shaft
return boosts. speed until the discharge temperature either drops below
warning level or exceeds emergency level. Each step
represents a three-minute period during which the
6.15.3 28-2* Discharge Temperature maximum allowed shaft speed is 10 Hz lower than the
Monitor previous step. The initial step occurs when the discharge
The Discharge Temperature Monitor (DTM) can be used to

temperature exceeds the warning level and uses the
current shaft speed as the basis for the 10 Hz speed
6 6
prevent the discharge temperature from reaching reduction.
dangerous levels.
The speed steps enforce maximum shaft speeds. If the
Two temperature levels of increasing severity can be reference corresponds to a lower speed, the reference is
programmed. These levels are referred to as "warning obeyed. If it corresponds to a higher speed, the speed is
level" (set in par. 28-24 Warning level) and "emergency limited to the maximum shaft speed for that step.
level," (set in par. 28-26 Emergency level) respectively, with
increasing severity. Each level corresponds to a particular
set of preventive actions.
Figure 6.38
NOTICE!
If the cascade controller is active, unwanted staging or de-
staging may result if the discharge temperature monitor
reduces the speed to Motor Speed Low Limit, par. 4-11 or
4-12.
Figure 6.37
28-20 Temperature Source
Option: Function:
Discharge temperatures above the emergency level cause Selects the input terminal to which the
an alarm and an immediate trip to prevent damage to the discharge temperature measurement device is
compressor. connected.
[0] * None No Source. The Discharge Temperature Monitor
is not active.
Normal operations apply for discharge temperatures below
warning level. The discharge temperature is passively [1] Analog The measurement device is connected to input
monitored without affecting drive operations. input 53 terminal 53. Program 6-10 Terminal 53 Low
Voltage to 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
Value to match the characteristics of the device.

28-20 Temperature Source 6.15.4 28-3* Crankcase Heating

Option: Function:
[2] Analog The measurement device is connected to input A DC-hold Current through the motor windings can be
input 54 terminal 54. Program 6-20 Terminal 54 Low used as an alternative to an external crankcase heater to
Voltage to 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. keep the compressor warm when stopped.
Value to match the characteristics of the device.
[3] Bus The actual discharge temperature should be The efficiency of the Crankcase Heating depends upon the
sent via Modbus RTU or FC protocol to 28-27 physical placing of the actual motor in the compressor.
Discharge temperature. The temperature could
be set via PCD write in 8-42 PCD Write Configu- If the Crankcase Heating is used together with Anti-Reverse
ration. Protection, the frequency converter first brakes for the set
duration followed by the heating current.
28-21 Temperature Unit
6 6 Option: Function:
28-30 Crankcase Heating Control
Option: Function:
Selects the unit of the discharge temperature.
[60 ] * ˚C Activate the DC-hold current when the motor is
[160] ˚F stopped. The current level is defined in
28-31 Heating DC Current.
28-24 Warning Level [0] * Disabled
Range: Function: [1] Enabled
130 * [10– Selects the temperature at which a
28-31 Heating DC Current
28-26 Emergency warning shall be issued. The action
Level] selected in 28-25 Warning Action Range: Function:
becomes active at this temperature. 20% * [0 – 25%] Set the DC-hold current as percentage of the
Enter the temperature measured in rated motor current in 1-24 Motor Current.
the unit selected in
28-32 Crankcase Heating Delayed
28-21 Temperature Unit.
Range: Function:
28-25 Warning Action 5 s* [5-65534 s] This time defines the delay after a stop and
Option: Function: until Crank Case Heating is applied to the
Selects the action to be taken by the compressor.
frequency converter for discharge temper-
atures above the value programmed in but 6.15.5 28-4* Anti-reverse Protection
below the value programmed in .
[0] None No action. Only a warning is issued. A compressor may have a preferred rotation direction and
[1] * Decrease A warning is issued and the motor speed is the instructions for cabling should always be followed, but
cooling lowered in steps of 10 Hz every 3 minutes the consequences of a reverse rotation are normally not
until the temperature either drops below the fatal. Set up parameter group 28-4* Anti-reverse Protection
level programmed in or exceeds the level to prevent reverse rotation at stop by injecting a DC-brake
programmed in . current into the motor a few seconds after stop followed
by the eventual coast of the motor when the discharge
28-26 Emergency Level
valve has closed.
Range: Function:
145* [28-24 Warning
Level-300]
Selects the temperature at which an
alarm shall be issued. Enter the
NOTICE!
The DC-brake Function is not operational before any Start
temperature in the unit programmed
Function has completed. In case of an emergency stop
in 28-21 Temperature Unit.
before the starting sequence has completed then the
28-27 Discharge Temperature compressor may rotate reverse for a short moment after
stop. Under normal circumstances, the Short Cycle
Range: Function:
Protection feature ensures the correct sequence.
0* [-2147483648 – Returns the actual value of the
2147483648] discharge temperature.

28-40 Reverse Protection Control Med.Motor Speed
Option: Function: Low Limit + Δ / 6 ≤ Speed < Motor Speed Low Limit + Δ / 2
Activate a DC-brake current when the motor is

stopped. The current level is defined in 28-41 DC High:
Brake Current. Not recommended for Piston Motor Speed
compressors. Low Limit + Δ / 2 ≤ Speed < Motor Speed Low Limit + 5 × Δ / 6
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled Full: Motor Speed
Low Limit + 5 × Δ / 6 ≤ Speed ≤ Motor Speed High Limit

28-41 DC Brake Current
Range: Function:
For example, if 4-11 Motor Speed High Limit is 5400 RPM
90% * [0 – max motor Set the DC-brake current as and Motor Speed Low Limit is 1800 RPM the four calculated
6 6
current ] percentage of the rated motor intervals become
current in 1-24 Motor Current.
28-42 DC Braking Time Low: 1800 RPM ≤ speed < 2350 RPM
Range: Function: Med: 2350 RPM ≤ speed < 3450 RPM
2.0 s* [0 – 60.0 s] Set the duration of the DC-brake current. High: 3450 RPM ≤ speed < 4550 RPM
28-43 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [RPM] Full: 4550 RPM ≤ speed ≤ 5400 RPM
Range: Function: The profile is presented on the LCP as a histogram. In each
700 RPM [0 – max Set the speed where the DC-brake speed interval, the indicated running time is accurate to
‘0’ = Off* motor speed] Current should cut in. The speed within 1 hour.
must be higher than 0 RPM for the
DC-brake to activate before the
motor is coasted at 0 RPM to
prevent a reverse rotation.
6.15.6 28-5* Load Profile
The Load Profiler is used to get a graphical presentation of

the load pattern a cooling system has been subjected to
over the last 6 months. The system load is assumed to be
proportional to the compressor speed, and the Load
Profiler measures the load as the running hours spent
operating within certain speed intervals.
Figure 6.39 Load Profile
The speed intervals are calculated based on 4-11 Motor

Speed Low Limit [RPM] (4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM])
and 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] (4-14 Motor Speed If [Off] is pressed on the LCP, the Load Profile is not
High Limit [Hz]) to match 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% updated.
loads as good as possible. The speed intervals are denoted 28-50 Reset Load Profile
“Off”, “Low”, “Med.”, “High” and “Full” and are calculated in
Option: Function:
the following manner:
[0] * Do not reset No function
[1] Reset Clears the measured running time in all five
Δ = Motor Speed High Limit − Motor Speed Low Limit
speed intervals.
Off: Speed = 0
Low: Motor Speed Low Limit ≤ Speed
< Motor Speed Low Limit + Δ / 6

28-74 Night Speed Drop [RPM]

Range: Function:
[] The value in this parameter decrements the value in
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] which becomes active
when night mode is activated.
6 6

6.16 Parameter Lists Conversion index Conversion factor

100
Changes during operation 75
”TRUE” means that the parameter can be changed while 74
the frequency converter is in operation. “FALSE” means 67
that the frequency converter must be stopped before a
6 1000000
change can be made.
5 100000
4 10000
4-Set-up
3 1000
'All set-ups': the parameter can be set individually in each
2 100
of the four set-ups, i. e. one single parameter can have
1 10
four different data values.
0 1
’1 set-up’: data value will be the same in all set-ups.
Data Description Type

-1
-2
0.1
0.01 6 6
-3 0.001
type
-4 0.0001
2 Integer 8 Int8
-5 0.00001
3 Integer 16 Int16
-6 0.000001
4 Integer 32 Int32
-7 0.0000001
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16 Table 6.13 Conversion Table
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible String VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 Boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD
Table 6.12
6.16.1 Conversion
The various attributes of each parameter are displayed in

Factory Setting. Parameter values are transferred as whole
numbers only. Conversion factors are therefore used to
transfer decimals.
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has a conversion factor of

0.1. To preset the minimum frequency to 10 Hz, transfer
the value 100. A conversion factor of 0.1 means that the
value transferred is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is
therefore read as 10.0.
Examples:
0s ⇒ conversion index 0
0.00s ⇒ conversion index -2
0ms ⇒ conversion index -3
0.00ms ⇒ conversion index -5

6.16.2 0-** Operation/Display
Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during sion index
operation
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [1] Hz 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-04 Operating State at Power-up [0] Resume All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-05 Local Mode Unit [0] As Motor Speed Unit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations
6 6
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
0-30 Custom Readout Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value 100 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-37 Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Personal Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-67 Bus Password Access 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
0-7* Clock Settings
0-70 Set Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
0-71 Date Format ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-72 Time Format ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-74 DST/Summertime [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-76 DST/Summertime Start ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay


operation
0-77 DST/Summertime End ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
0-79 Clock Fault [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-81 Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-82 Additional Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
0-83 Additional Non-Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 TimeOfDay
0-89 Date and Time Readout 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[25]
6 6

6.16.3 1-** Load/Motor

operation
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-03 Torque Characteristics [0] Compressor CT All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-1* Motor Selection
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-1* VVC+ PM
1-14 Damping Gain 120 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
6 6
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-17 Voltage filter time const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
1-28 Motor Rotation Check [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
1-50 Motor Magnetization at Zero Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetizing [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Dampening 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-70 PM Start Mode [1] Parking All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-71 Start Delay 00 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-72 Start Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8


operation
1-73 Flying Start ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
1-77 Compressor Start Max Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-78 Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip 5s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6 6
1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-86 Compressor Min. Speed for Trip [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-87 Compressor Min. Speed for Trip [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-93 Thermistor Source [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

6.16.4 3-** Reference/Ramps

operation
3-0* Reference Limits
3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
6 6
3-13 Reference Site [0] Linked to Hand / Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 53 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-16 Reference 2 Source [20] Digital pot.meter All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-17 Reference 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-5* Ramp 2
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-82 Starting Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

6.16.5 4-** Limits/Warnings

operation
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode 110 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
6 6
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-53 Warning Speed High outputSpeedHighLimit (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
-999999 ReferenceFeed-
4-56 Warning Feedback Low backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999 ReferenceFeed-
4-57 Warning Feedback High backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8

6.16.6 5-** Digital In/Out

operation
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP - Active at 24V All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6 6
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop [1] Safe Stop Alarm All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16


operation
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6 6

6.16.7 6-** Analog In/Out

operation
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-02 Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 53
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6 6
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-2* Analog Input 54
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value -1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-3* Analog Input X30/11
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-4* Analog Input X30/12
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-5* Analog Output 42
6-50 Terminal 42 Output [100] Output frequency All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-6* Analog Output X30/8
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16


operation
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6 6

6.16.8 7-** Controllers

operation
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source null All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
6 6
7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 1.0000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
7-09 Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp 300RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
7-1* Torque PI Ctrl.
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 10000.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

6.16.9 8-** Comm. and Options

operation
8-0* General Settings
8-01 Control Site [0] Digital and ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Word Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 20 s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Word Timeout Function [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6 6
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
8-10 Control Word Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [1] Profile Default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-16 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
8-40 Telegram Selection [1] Standard telegram 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-42 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
8-43 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83 Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-9* Bus Jog
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 200 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

6.16.10 14-** Special Functions

operation
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern [1] SFAVM All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
6 6
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-13 Mains Failure Step Factor 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
14-2* Trip Reset
14-20 Reset Mode [10] Automatic reset x 10 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 30 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Cont, Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-31 Current Lim Contr, Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 26 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimizing
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation 40 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 30 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 2 uF 1 set-up FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter 7 mH 1 set-up FALSE -6 Uint16
14-6* Auto Derate
14-60 Function at Over Temperature [1] Derate All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload [1] Derate All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current 95 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-9* Fault Settings
14-90 Fault Level ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

6.16.11 15-** Drive Information

operation
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
6 6
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-08 Number of Starts 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-23 Historic log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-3* Alarm Log
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-31 Alarm Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Alarm Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-34 Alarm Log: Status 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-35 Alarm Log: Alarm Text 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[32]
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]


operation
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
6 6
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

6.16.12 16-** Data Readouts

operation
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-01 Reference [Unit] 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-09 Custom Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
6 6
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor current 0A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int32
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-41 LCP Bottom Statusline 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[50]
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-52 Feedback[Unit] 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit] 0 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32


operation
16-68 Pulse Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
6 6
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-96 Maintenance Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

6.16.13 25-** Cascade Controller

operation
25-0* System Settings
25-00 Pack Controller [0] Disabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
25-04 Compressor Cycling [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-06 Number of Compressors 2 N/A 2 set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
25-2* Zone Settings
25-20 Neutral Zone [unit] 4 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
25-21 + Zone [unit] 3 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
6 6
25-22 - Zone [unit] 3 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
25-23 Fixed Speed neutral Zone [unit] 4 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
25-24 + Zone Delay 120 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
25-25 - Zone Delay 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
25-26 ++ Zone Delay 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
25-27 -- Zone Delay 30 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
25-3* Staging Functions
25-30 Destage At No-Flow [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-31 Stage Function [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-32 Stage Function Time 15 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-33 Destage Function [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-34 Destage Function Time 15 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-4* Staging Settings
25-42 Staging Threshold ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
25-43 Destaging Threshold ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
25-44 Staging Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
25-45 Staging Speed [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
25-46 Destaging Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
25-47 Destaging Speed [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
25-8* Status
VisStr[2
25-80 Pack Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 5]
VisStr[2
25-81 Compressor Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 5]
25-82 Lead Compressor 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
VisStr[4
25-83 Relay Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 ]
25-84 Compressor ON Time 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
25-85 Relay ON Time 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
25-86 Reset Relay Counters [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-87 Inverse Interlock 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-88 Pack capacity [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
25-9* Service
25-90 Compressor Interlock [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
25-91 Manual Alternation 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8

6.16.14 28-** Compressor Function

operation
28-0* Short Cycle Protection
28-00 Short Cycle Protection [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
28-01 Interval between Starts 300 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
28-02 Minimum Run Time 12 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
28-1* Oil Return Management
28-10 Oil Return Management ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
28-11 Low Speed Running Time 60 min All set-ups TRUE 70 Uint16
6 6
28-12 Fixed Boost Interval 24 h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint8
28-13 Boost Duration 30 s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
28-2* Discharge Temperature Monitor
28-20 Temperature Source [0] None All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
28-21 Temperature Unit [60] °C All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
28-24 Warning Level 130 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
28-25 Warning Action [1] Decrease cooling All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
28-26 Emergency Level 145 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
28-27 Discharge Temperature 0 DTM_ReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
28-3* Crankcase Heating
28-30 Crankcase Heating Control ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
28-31 Heating DC Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
28-32 Crankcase Heating Delay 5s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
28-4* Anti-reverse Protection at Stop
28-40 Reverse Protection Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
28-41 DC Brake Current 90 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
28-42 DC Braking Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
28-43 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
28-44 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
28-5* Load Profile
28-50 Reset Load Profile [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
28-59 Load Profile Data 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
28-7* Day/Night Settings
28-74 Night Speed Drop [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
28-76 Night Speed Drop [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

Troubleshooting Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
7 Troubleshooting
If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its

cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
7.1 Status Messages (see also Table 7.1).
7.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages
Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,
A warning or an alarm is signaled by the relevant LED on meaning that the mains supply must be switched off
the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
code on the display. on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and can
be reset as described above once the cause has been
rectified.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer
present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the
critical, but are not necessarily so. automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode (Warning:
automatic wake-up is possible!)
7 7
In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter trips.
Reset the alarm to resume operation once the cause has If a warning or alarm is marked against a code in Table 7.1,
been rectified. this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm,
or else that it is possible to specify whether a warning or
an alarm should be displayed for a given fault.
Three ways to reset:
• Press [Reset]. This is possible, for instance, in 1-90 Motor Thermal
• Via a digital input with the “Reset” function. Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on
• Via serial communication/optional fieldbus. coasting, and the alarm and warning flash. Once the
problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
NOTICE! flashing until the frequency converter is reset.
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] to
restart the motor.
NOTICE!
No missing motor phase detection (numbers 30-32) and no
stall detection is active when 1-10 Motor Construction is set
to [1] PM non salient SPM.
No. Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

Reference
1 10 Volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function
3 No motor (X) 1-80 Function at Stop
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12 Function at
Mains Imbalance
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC over-voltage X X
8 DC under voltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR over temperature (X) (X) 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection
11 Motor thermistor over temperature (X) (X) 1-90 Motor Thermal
Protection


Reference
12 Torque limit X X
13 Over Current X X X
14 Ground Fault X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short Circuit X X
17 Control word time-out (X) (X) 8-04 Control Word
Timeout Function
20 Temp. Input Error
21 Param Error
22 Hoist Mech. Brake (X) (X) Parameter group 2-2*
23 Internal Fans X
24 External Fans X
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X
7 7
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13 Brake Power
Monitoring
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15 Brake Check
29 Heatsink temp X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
33 Inrush Fault X X
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X
35 Option Fault
36 Mains failure X X
37 Phase imbalance X
38 Internal Fault X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) 5-00 Digital I/O Mode,
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
42 Ovrld X30/6-7 (X)
43 Ext. Supply (option)
45 Ground Fault 2 X X
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X 1-86 Trip Speed Low
[RPM]
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA parameter out of range X


Reference
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA time-out X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
60 External Interlock X X
61 Feedback Error (X) (X) 4-30 Motor Feedback
Loss Function
62 Output Frequency at Maximum Limit X
63 Mechanical Brake Low (X) 2-20 Release Brake
Current
64 Voltage Limit X
65 Control Board Over-temperature X X X
66 Heat sink Temperature Low X
67
68
Option Configuration has Changed
Safe Stop (X)
X
(X)1) 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
7 7
Stop
69 Pwr. Card Temp X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop
72 Dangerous failure
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart (X) (X) 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe
Stop
74 PTC Thermistor X
75 Illegal Profile Sel. X
76 Power Unit Setup X
77 Reduced power mode X 14-59 Actual Number of
Inverter Units
78 Tracking Error (X) (X) 4-34 Tracking Error
Function
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive Initialized to Default Value X
81 CSIV corrupt X
82 CSIV parameter error X
83 Illegal Option Combination X
84 No Safety Option X
85 Dang fail PB
86 Dang fail DI
88 Option Detection X
89 Mechanical Brake Sliding X
90 Feedback Monitor (X) (X) 17-61 Feedback Signal
Monitoring
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X S202
102 Too many CAN objects
103 Illegal axis num.
104 Mixing Fans
105 Error not reset
106 HOME not done
107 Home vel zero
108 Position error


Reference
109 Index not found
110 Unknown cmd.
111 SW end limit
112 Unknown param
113 FC not enabled
114 Too many loops
115 Par.save failed
116 Param. memory
117 Progr. Memory
118 Reset by CPU
119 User abort
121 No more SDO channels
125 HW end limit
7 7 149
150
Too many inter.
No ext. 24 V
151 GOSUB > limit
152 Return @ limit
154 D.out overload
155 LINK failed
156 Illegal double arg.
160 Internal Intr. error
162 Memory error
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning X
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm X
165 ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning X
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm X
246 Pwr.card supply
250 New spare parts X
251 New Type Code X X
Table 7.1 Alarm/Warning Code List

(X) Dependent on parameter
1) Cannot be Auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode

A trip is the action following an alarm. The trip coasts the Warning yellow
motor and is reset by pressing [Reset] or by a digital input Alarm flashing red
(parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs [1]). The origin event Trip locked yellow and red
that caused an alarm cannot damage the frequency
converter or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an Table 7.2 LED Indication
action when an alarm occurs, which could damage the
frequency converter or connected parts. A trip lock
situation can only be reset by a power cycling.
Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Alarm Word Warning Word Warning Extended Extended
2 Word 2 Status Word Status Word 2
Alarm Word Extended Status Word
0 00000001 1 Brake Check ServiceTrip, Brake Check (W28) Start Ramping Off
(A28) Read/Write Delayed
1 00000002 2 Pwr.card temp ServiceTrip, Pwr.card temp (A69) Stop AMA Running Hand/Auto
(A69) (reserved) Delayed
2 00000004 4 Ground Fault
(A14)
ServiceTrip,
Typecode/
Ground Fault (W14) reserved Start CW/CCW Profibus OFF1
start_possible is active
7 7
Sparepart active, when the
DI selections [12]
OR [13] are
active and the
requested
direction
matches the
reference sign
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.Card Temp ServiceTrip, Ctrl.Card Temp (W65) reserved Slow Down Profibus OFF2
(A65) (reserved) slow down active
command active,
e.g. via CTW bit
11 or DI
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO ServiceTrip, Ctrl. Word TO (W17) Catch Up Profibus OFF3
(A17) (reserved) catch up active
command active,
e.g. via CTW bit
12 or DI
5 00000020 32 Over Current reserved Over Current (W13) reserved Feedback High Relay 123 active
(A13) feedback > 4-57
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit reserved Torque Limit (W12) reserved Feedback Low Start Prevented
(A12) feedback < 4-56
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over reserved Motor Th Over (W11) reserved Output Current Control Ready
(A11) High
current > 4-51
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Over reserved Motor ETR Over reserved Output Current Drive Ready
(A10) (W10) Low
current < 4-50
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Discharge Inverter Overld (W9) Discharge Output Freq Quick Stop
(A9) High High High
speed > 4-53
10 00000400 1024 DC under Volt Start Failed DC under Volt (W8) Multi- Output Freq Low DC Brake
(A8) motor speed < 4-52
underloa
d

11 00000800 2048 DC over Volt Speed Limit DC over Volt (W7) Multi- Brake Check OK Stop
(A7) motor brake test NOT
Overload ok
12 00001000 4096 Short Circuit External DC Voltage Low (W6) Compress Braking Max Stand by
(A16) Interlock or BrakePower >
Interlock BrakePowerLimit
(2-12)
13 00002000 8192 Inrush Fault Illegal Option DC Voltage High Mechanic Braking Freeze Output
(A33) Combi. (W5) al Brake Request
Sliding
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. Loss No Safety Mains ph. Loss (W4) Safe Out of Speed Freeze Output
(A4) Option Option Range
Warning
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK reserved No Motor (W3) Auto DC OVC Active Jog Request
7 7 16 00010000 65536 Live Zero Error reserved Live Zero Error (W2)
Braking
AC Brake Jog
(A2)
17 00020000 131072 Internal Fault KTY error 10V Low (W1) KTY Warn Password Start Request
(A38) Timelock
number of
allowed
password trials
exceeded -
timelock active
18 00040000 262144 Brake Overload Fans error Brake Overload Fans Password Start
(A26) (W26) Warn Protection
0-61 =
ALL_NO_ACCESS
OR
BUS_NO_ACCESS
OR
BUS_READONLY
19 00080000 524288 U phase Loss ECB error Brake Resistor (W25) ECB Warn Reference High Start Applied
(A30) reference > 4-55
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss reserved Brake IGBT (W27) reserved Reference Low Start delay
(A31) reference < 4-54
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss reserved Speed Limit (W49) reserved Local Reference Sleep
(A32) reference site =
REMOTE -> auto
on pressed &
active
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus Fault reserved Fieldbus Fault (W34) reserved Protection mode Sleep Boost
(A34) notifikation
23 00800000 8388608 24 V Supply reserved 24V Supply Low reserved Unused Running
Low (A47) (W47)
24 01000000 16777216 Mains Failure reserved Mains Failure (W36) reserved Unused Drive Bypass
(A36)
25 02000000 33554432 1.8V Supply Current Limit Current Limit (W59) reserved Unused Fire Mode
Low (A48) (A59)
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor reserved Low Temp (W66) reserved Unused External Interlock
(A25)

27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT reserved Voltage Limit (W64) reserved Unused Firemode Limit
(A27) Exceed
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change reserved Encoder loss (W90) reserved Unused FlyStart active
(A67)
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Encoder loss Output freq. lim. BackEMF Unused
Initialized(A80) (A90) (W62) too High
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop (A68) PTC Safe Stop (W68) PTC Unused
Thermistor Thermist
(A74) or (W74)
31 80000000 2147483648 Mech. brake Dangerous Extended Status Protection Mode
low (A63) failure (A72) Word
Table 7.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for
diagnostics. See also 16-94 Ext. Status Word.
7 7
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal 50. A phase is missing on the supply side, or the line voltage
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V imbalance is too high. This message also appears for a
supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω. fault in the input rectifier on the adjustable frequency
drive. Options are programmed at 14-12 Function at Mains
This condition can be caused by a short in a connected
Imbalance.
potentiometer or improper wiring of the potentiometer.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Check the supply voltage and supply currents to the
Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the warning clears,
adjustable frequency drive.
the problem is with the customer wiring. If the warning
does not clear, replace the control card.
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the
This warning or alarm only appears if programmed by the
high voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
user in 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one
adjustable frequency drive voltage rating. The unit is still
of the analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum
active.
value programmed for that input. Broken wiring or faulty
device sending the signal can cause this condition. WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the low
Troubleshooting
voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
Check connections on all the analog input
adjustable frequency drive voltage rating. The unit is still
terminals. Control card terminals 53 and 54 for
active.
signals, terminal 55 common. MCB 101 terminals
11 and 12 for signals, terminal 10 common. MCB WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
109 terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals, terminals 2, 4, 6 If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
common. frequency converter trips after a time.
Check that the adjustable frequency drive Troubleshooting
programming and switch settings match the Connect a brake resistor
analog signal type. Extend the ramp time
Perform Input Terminal Signal Test. Change the ramp type
Activate the functions in 2-10 Brake Function
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
No motor has been connected to the output of the
frequency converter. If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag,
use kinetic back-up (14-10 Line Failure)

WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage Running AMA in 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation

If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC link) drops below (AMA) tunes the adjustable frequency drive to the
the undervoltage limit, the adjustable frequency drive motor more accurately and reduces thermal
checks if a 24 V DC backup supply is connected. If no 24 V loading.
DC backup supply is connected, the adjustable frequency
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp
drive trips after a fixed time delay. The time delay varies
Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select
with unit size.
whether the adjustable frequency drive issues a warning or
Troubleshooting an alarm in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
Make sure that the supply voltage matches the
Troubleshooting
adjustable frequency drive voltage.
Check for motor overheating.
Perform input voltage test.
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
Perform soft charge circuit test.
When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload thermistor is connected correctly between either
The adjustable frequency drive is about to cut out because terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and
of an overload (current too high for too long). The counter terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the
7 7 for electronic, thermal inverter protection issues a warning terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage.
at 98% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The Check 1-93 Thermistor Source selects terminal 53
adjustable frequency drive cannot be reset until the or 54.
counter is below 90%.
When using digital inputs 18 or 19, check that
The fault is that the adjustable frequency drive has run
the thermistor is connected correctly between
with more than 100% overload for too long.
either terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only)
Troubleshooting and terminal 50. Check 1-93 Thermistor Source
Compare the output current shown on the LCP selects terminal 18 or 19.
with the adjustable frequency drive rated current.
Compare the output current shown on the LCP WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit
with measured motor current. The torque has exceeded the value in 4-16 Torque Limit
Display the Thermal Drive Load on the LCP and Motor Mode or the value in 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
monitor the value. When running above the Mode. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this from
adjustable frequency drive continuous current a warning only condition to a warning followed by an
rating, the counter increases. When running alarm.
below the adjustable frequency drive continuous Troubleshooting
current rating, the counter decreases. If the motor torque limit is exceeded during
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time.
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the If the generator torque limit is exceeded during
motor is too hot. Select whether the adjustable frequency ramp-down, extend the ramp-down time.
drive issues a warning or an alarm when the counter
If torque limit occurs while running, possibly
reaches 100% in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault
increase the torque limit. Make sure that the
occurs when the motor runs with more than 100%
system can operate safely at a higher torque.
overload for too long.
Check the application for excessive current draw
Troubleshooting
on the motor.
Check for motor overheating.
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded
The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
Check that the motor current set in 1-24 Motor rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 1.5 s,
Current is correct. then the adjustable frequency drive trips and issues an
Ensure that Motor data in parameters 1-20 to alarm. This fault can be caused by shock loading or quick
1-25 are set correctly. acceleration with high inertia loads. It can also appear after
kinetic backup if the acceleration during ramp-up is quick.
If an external fan is in use, check in 1-91 Motor
If extended mechanical brake control is selected, trip can
External Fan that it is selected.
be reset externally.

Troubleshooting Check the operation of the communication

Remove power and check if the motor shaft can equipment.
be turned. Verify a proper installation based on EMC
Make sure that the motor size matches the requirements.
ALARM 18, Start failed
Check parameters 1-20 to 1-25 for correct motor The speed has not exceeded 1-77 Compressor Start Max
data. Speed [RPM] during start within the allowed time. (set in
ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip). This may be
There is current from the output phases to ground, either caused by a blocked motor.
in the cable between the adjustable frequency drive and Warning/Alarm 19, Discharge Temperature High
the motor or in the motor itself. Warning:
Troubleshooting: The discharge temperature exceeds the level programmed
Remove power to the adjustable frequency drive in 28-25 Warning Level.
and repair the ground fault. Alarm:
The discharge temperature exceeds the level programmed
Check for ground faults in the motor by
measuring the resistance to ground of the motor in 28-26 Emergency Level. 7 7
leads and the motor with a megohmmeter. WARNING/ALARM 20, Temp. input error
ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch The temperature sensor is not connected.
A fitted option is not operational with the present control WARNING/ALARM 21, Parameter error
board hardware or software. The parameter is out of range. The parameter number is
Record the value of the following parameters and contact reported in the LCP. The affected parameter must be set to
your Danfoss supplier: a valid value.
15-40 FC Type WARNING/ALARM 22, Hoist mechanical brake

Report value shows what kind it is.
15-41 Power Section 0 = The torque ref. was not reached before time-out.
15-42 Voltage 1 = There was no brake feedback before time-out.
15-43 Software Version WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
15-45 Actual Typecode String
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
15-49 SW ID Control Card can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
15-50 SW ID Power Card For the D, E, and F Frame filters, the regulated voltage to
15-60 Option Mounted the fans is monitored.
15-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot) Troubleshooting

Check for proper fan operation.
ALARM 16, Short circuit
There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring. Cycle power to the adjustable frequency drive
and check that the fan operates briefly at start-
Remove power to the adjustable frequency drive and
up.
repair the short circuit.
Check the sensors on the heatsink and control
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
card.
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
The warning is only active when 8-04 Control Word Timeout WARNING 24, External fan fault
Function is NOT set to [0] Off. The fan warning function is an extra protective function
If 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5] Stop and that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
Trip, a warning appears and the frequency converter ramps can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
down until it stops then displays an alarm. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Check for proper fan operation.
Check connections on the serial communication Cycle power to the adjustable frequency drive
cable. and check that the fan operates briefly at start-
Increase 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time up.

Check the sensors on the heatsink and control Remove power from the adjustable frequency drive and
card. check motor phase U.
WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short Motor phase V between the adjustable frequency drive
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the and the motor is missing.
warning appears. The adjustable frequency drive is still Remove power from the adjustable frequency drive and
operational but without the brake function. Remove power check motor phase V.
to the adjustable frequency drive and replace the brake
resistor (see 2-15 Brake Check). ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
Motor phase W between the adjustable frequency drive
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit and the motor is missing.
The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
a mean value over the last 120 seconds of run time. The Remove power from the adjustable frequency drive and
calculation is based on the intermediate circuit voltage and check motor phase W.
the brake resistance value set in 2-16 AC Brake Max. ALARM 33, Inrush fault
Current. The warning is active when the dissipated braking Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
7 7
energy is higher than 90% of the brake resistance power. If period. Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
[2] Trip is selected in 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring, the
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault
adjustable frequency drive trips when the dissipated
The serial communication bus on the communication
braking energy reaches 100%.
option card is not working.
WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault
WARNING/ALARM 35, Option fault
The brake transistor is monitored during operation and if a
An option alarm is received. The alarm is option-specific.
short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a
The most likely cause is a power-up or a communication
warning is issued. The adjustable frequency drive is still
fault.
operational but, since the brake transistor has short-
circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure
resistor, even if it is inactive. This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to
Remove power to the adjustable frequency drive and the adjustable frequency drive is lost and 14-10 Mains
remove the brake resistor. Failure is NOT set to [0] No Function. Check the fuses to the
adjustable frequency drive and line power supply to the
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
unit.
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
Check 2-15 Brake Check. ALARM 37, Phase imbalance
There is a current imbalance between the power units
ALARM 29, Heatsink temp
The maximum temperature of the heatsink has been ALARM 38, Internal fault
exceeded. The temperature fault will not reset until the When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in
temperature falls below a defined heatsink temperature. Table 7.4 is displayed.
The trip and reset points are different based on the Troubleshooting
adjustable frequency drive power size. Cycle power
Troubleshooting Check that the option is properly installed
Check for the following conditions.
Check for loose or missing wiring
Ambient temperature too high.
It may be necessary to contact your Danfoss supplier or
Motor cable too long.
service department. Note the code number for further
Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the troubleshooting directions.
Blocked airflow around the adjustable frequency No. Text
drive. 0 Serial port cannot be initialized. Contact your
Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service Department.
Damaged heatsink fan.
256-258 Power EEPROM data is defective or too old.
Dirty heatsink. Replace power card.
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing 512-519 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or
Motor phase U between the adjustable frequency drive Danfoss Service Department.
and the motor is missing.

No. Text For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove
783 Parameter value outside of min/max limits the short-circuit connection. Check 5-33 Term X30/7 Digi
1024-1284 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or the Out (MCB 101).
Danfoss Service Department. ALARM 43, Ext. supply
1299 Option SW in slot A is too old MCB 113 Ext. Relay Option is mounted without ext. 24V
1300 Option SW in slot B is too old DC. Either connect an ext. 24V DC supply or specify that
1302 Option SW in slot C1 is too old no external supply is used via 14-80 Option Supplied by
1315 Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed) External 24VDC [0]. A change in 14-80 Option Supplied by
1316 Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed) External 24VDC requires a power cycle.
1318 Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not ALARM 45, Earth fault 2
allowed) Ground fault on start-up.
1379-2819 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or
Troubleshooting
Danfoss Service Department.
Check for proper grounding and loose
2561 Replace control card
connections.
2820 LCP stack overflow
Check for proper wire size.
7 7
2821 Serial port overflow
2822 USB port overflow Check motor cables for short-circuits or leakage
3072-5122 Parameter value is outside its limits currents.
5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with
ALARM 46, Power card supply
control board hardware
The supply on the power card is out of range.
5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with
control board hardware There are three power supplies generated by the switch
5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with
mode power supply (SMPS) on the power card: 24 V, 5 V,
control board hardware ±18 V. When powered with 24 V DC with the MCB 107
option, only the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored.
5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with
When powered with three phase AC line voltage, all three
control board hardware
supplies are monitored.
5376-6231 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or
Danfoss Service Department. Troubleshooting
Check for a defective power card.
Table 7.4 Internal Fault Codes
Check for a defective control card.
ALARM 39, Heatsink sensor Check for a defective option card.
No feedback from the heatsink temperature sensor. If a 24 V DC power supply is used, verify proper
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on supply power.
the power card. The problem could be on the power card, WARNING 47, 24 V supply low
on the gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. The external
power card and gate drive card. 24 V DC backup power supply may be overloaded,
WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27 otherwise contact the Danfoss supplier.
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove short- WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode. allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29 control card. Check for a defective control card. If an
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove short- option card is present, check for an overvoltage condition.
circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and WARNING 49, Speed limit
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. When the speed is not within the specified range in
WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and 4-13 Motor Speed
overload of digital output on X30/7 High Limit [RPM], the adjustable frequency drive shows a
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove warning. When the speed is below the specified limit in
the short-circuit connection. Check 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi 1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or
Out (MCB 101). stopping), the adjustable frequency drive will trip.

ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed higher output frequency. The warning will clear when the
Contact your Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service output drops below the maximum limit.
Department. ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low
The actual motor current has not exceeded the “release
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom brake” current within the “Start delay” time window.
The settings for motor voltage, motor current and motor WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to The cut-out temperature of the control card is 176 °F [80
1-25.
°C].
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
Troubleshooting
The motor current is too low. Check the settings.
• Check that the ambient operating temperature is
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big within limits.
The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.
• Check for clogged filters.
ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
• Check fan operation.
• Check the control card.

7 7 ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range
The parameter values of the motor are outside of the WARNING 66, Heatsink temperature low
acceptable range. AMA will not run. The adjustable frequency drive is too cold to operate. This
warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
module.
The user has interrupted the AMA.
Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a
ALARM 57, AMA internal fault trickle amount of current can be supplied to the adjustable
Try to restart AMA again. Repeated restarts can overheat frequency drive whenever the motor is stopped by setting
the motor. 2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current at 5% and 1-80 Function at
ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault Stop.
Contact your Danfoss supplier. ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
One or more options have either been added or removed
WARNING 59, Current limit since the last power-down. Check that the configuration
The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit. change is intentional and reset the unit.
Ensure that motor data in parameters 1-20 to 1-25 are set ALARM 68, Safe Stop activated
correctly. Possibly increase the current limit. Be sure that Loss of the 24 V DC signal on terminal 37 has caused the
the system can operate safely at a higher limit. filter to trip. To resume normal operation, apply 24 V DC to
WARNING 60, External interlock terminal 37 and reset the filter.
A digital input signal is indicating a fault condition external ALARM 69, Power card temperature
to the frequency converter. An external interlock has The temperature sensor on the power card is either too
commanded the frequency converter to trip. Clear the hot or too cold.
external fault condition. To resume normal operation,
Troubleshooting
apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external
Check that the ambient operating temperature is
interlock. Reset the frequency converter.
within limits.
WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error
Check for clogged filters.
An error between calculated speed and speed
measurement from feedback device. The function Warning/ Check fan operation.
Alarm/Disabling setting is in 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Check the power card.
Function. Accepted error setting in 4-31 Motor Feedback
ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration
Speed Error and the allowed time the error occur setting in
The control card and power card are incompatible. Contact
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout. During a commissioning
your supplier with the type code of the unit from the
procedure the function may be effective.
nameplate and the part numbers of the cards to check
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit compatibility.
The output frequency has reached the value set in
ALARM 71, PTC 1 safe stop
4-19 Max Output Frequency. Check the application to
Safe Stop has been activated from the MCB 112 PTC
determine the cause. Possibly increase the output
Thermistor Card (motor too warm). Normal operation can
frequency limit. Be sure the system can operate safely at a
be resumed when the MCB 112 applies 24 V DC to T-37

again (when the motor temperature reaches an acceptable ALARM 80, Drive initialized to default value
level) and when the Digital Input from the MCB 112 is Parameter settings are initialized to default settings after a
deactivated. When that happens, a reset signal must be is manual reset. Reset the unit to clear the alarm.
be sent (via Bus, Digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]). ALARM 81, CSIV corrupt
ALARM 72, Dangerous failure CSIV file has syntax errors.
Safe Stop with Trip Lock. The Dangerous Failure Alarm is ALARM 82, CSIV parameter error
issued if the combination of safe stop commands is CSIV failed to init a parameter.
unexpected. This is the case if VLT PTC Thermistor Card
enables X44/10 but safe stop is somehow not enabled. ALARM 83, Illegal option combination
Furthermore, if the MCB 112 is the only device using safe The mounted options are not supported to work together.
stop (specified through selection [4] or [5] in 5-19 Terminal ALARM 84, No safety option
37 Safe Stop), an unexpected combination is activation of The safety option was removed without applying a general
safe stop without the X44/10 being activated. The reset. Reconnect the safety option.
following table summarizes the unexpected combinations
ALARM 88, Option detection
that lead to Alarm 72.
A change in the option layout has been detected. This
NOTICE!
Iif X44/10 is activated in selection 2 or 3, this signal is
alarm occurs when 14-89 Option Detection is set to [0]
Frozen configuration and the option layout for some reason 7 7
ignored. However, the MCB 112 will still be able to activate has changed. An option layout change has to be enabled
Safe Stop. in 14-89 Option Detection before the change is accepted. If
the change of configuration is not accepted, it is only
WARNING 73, Safe stop auto restart possible to reset Alarm 88 (Trip-lock) when the option
Safe stopped. With automatic restart enabled, the motor configuration has been re-established/corrected.
may start when the fault is cleared. WARNING 89, Mechanical brake sliding
ALARM 74, PTC Thermistor The hoist brake monitor has detected a motor speed > 10
Alarm related to the ATEX option. The PTC is not working. RPM.
ALARM 75, Illegal profile sel. ALARM 90, Feedback monitor

Parameter value must not be written while motor is Check the connection to encoder/resolver option and
running. Stop motor before writing MCO profile to eventually replace the MCB 102 or MCB 103.
8-10 Control Word Profile for instance. ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings
WARNING 76, Power unit setup Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input)
The required number of power units does not match the when a KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal
detected number of active power units. 54.
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode WARNING/ALARM 104, Mixing fan fault
This warning indicates that the frequency converter is The fan monitor checks that the fan is spinning at power-
operating in reduced power mode (i.e. less than the up or whenever the mixing fan is turned on. If the fan is
allowed number of inverter sections). This warning is not operating, then the fault is annunciated. The mixing-
generated on power cycle when the frequency converter is fan fault can be configured as a warning or an alarm trip
set to run with fewer inverters, and remains on. by 14-53 Fan Monitor.
ALARM 78, Tracking error Troubleshooting

The difference between set point value and actual value Cycle power to the frequency converter to
has exceeded the value in 4-35 Tracking Error. Disable the determine if the warning/alarm returns.
function by 4-34 Tracking Error Function or select an alarm/ WARNING 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning
warning also in 4-34 Tracking Error Function. Investigate the The frequency converter has run above the characteristic
mechanics around the load and motor, Check feedback curve for more than 50 s. The warning is activated at 83%
connections from motor – encoder – to frequency and de-activated at 65% of the permitted thermal
converter. Select motor feedback function in 4-30 Motor overload.
Feedback Loss Function. Adjust tracking error band in
ALARM 164, ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm
4-35 Tracking Error and 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping.
Operating above the characteristic curve for more than 60
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration s within a period of 600 s activates the alarm and the
The scaling card is the incorrect part number or not frequency converter trips.
installed. Also MK102 connector on the power card could
not be installed.

WARNING 165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning

The frequency converter is running more than 50 s below
the permitted minimum frequency (1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
points freq. [0]).
ALARM 166, ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm
The frequency converter has operated more than 60 s (in a
period of 600 s) below the permitted minimum frequency
(1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. [0]).
ALARM 246, Power card supply
This alarm is only for F Frame frequency converters. It is
equivalent to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm log
indicates which power module generated the alarm:
1 = left most inverter module.
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
7 7 2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
converter.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
5 = rectifier module.
WARNING 250, New spare part
A component in the adjustable frequency drive has been
replaced. Reset the adjustable frequency drive for normal
operation.
WARNING 251, New typecode
The power card or other components have been replaced
and the type code changed. Reset to remove the warning
and resume normal operation.

General Specifications Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
8 General Specifications
8.1.1 Mains Supply 3x200-240 V AC
P15K P18K P22K

High/Normal Load1) NO NO NO
Typical Shaft Output [HP/kW] 25/18.5 30/22 40/30
Enclosure IP20 B4 C3 C3
Enclosure IP21, IP55, IP66 C1 C1 C1
Output current
Continuous
74.8 88 115
(3 x 200-240 V) [A]
Intermittent (60 s overload)
82.3 96.8 127
(3 x 200-240 V) [A]
Continuous
26.9 31.7 41.4
kVA (208 V AC) [kVA]
Max. input current
Continuous
68 80 104
(3 x 200-240 V) [A]
(3 x 200-240 V) [A]
74.8 88 114 8 8
Additional specifications
IP20 max. cable cross-section5) (mains, brake, motor and load sharing) 35 (2) 50 (1) 50 (1)
IP21, IP55, IP66 max. cable cross-section5) (mains, motor, load sharing) 50 (1) 50 (1) 50 (1)
[mm2 (AWG)] 2)
Max cable size with mains disconnect [mm2 (AWG)] 2) 50, 35, 35 (1, 2, 2)
Estimated power loss at rated max. load [W] 4) 737 845 1140
Weight, IP20 [lbs/kg] 51.8/23.5 110/50 110/50
Weight, IP21, IP55/IP66 [lbs/kg] 99.2/45 99.2/45 99.2/45
Efficiency4) 0.96 0.97 0.97
Table 8.1 Mains Supply 3x200-240 V AC

For fuse ratings, see 3.4.1 Fuses
1) Normal overload = 110% torque during 60 s.
2) American Wire Gauge.
3) Measured using 5 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4) The typical power loss is at nominal load conditions and expected to be within ±15% (tolerance relates to variety in voltage and
cable conditions).
Values are based on a typical motor efficiency (eff2/eff3 border line). Motors with lower efficiency will also add to the power loss in the
frequency converter and opposite.
If the switching frequency is increased compared to the default setting, the power losses may rise significantly.
LCP and typical control card power consumptions are included. Further options and customer load may add up to 30 W to the losses.
(Though typical only 4 W extra for a fully loaded control card, or options for slot A or slot B, each).
Although measurements are made with state of the art equipment, some measurement inaccuracy must be allowed for (±5%).
5) The three values for the max. cable cross section are for single core, flexible wire and flexible wire with sleeve, respectively.

P15K P18K P22K

Typical shaft output [HP/kW] 25/18.5 30/22 40/30
Enclosure IP20 B3 B4 B4
Enclosure IP21, IP55, IP66 B1 B2 B2
Output current
Continuous
37.5 44 61
(3 x 380-440 V) [A]
41.3 48.4 67.1
(3 x 380-440 V) [A]
Continuous
34 40 52
(3 x 441-500 V) [A]
37.4 44 57.2
(3 x 441-500 V) [A]
Continuous kVA
26 30.5 42.3
(400 V AC) [kVA]
Continuous kVA
27.1 31.9 41.4
(460 V AC) [kVA]
Max. input current
Continuous
34 40 55
8 8 (3 x 380-440 V) [A]
37.4 44 60.5
(3 x 380-440 V ) [A]
Continuous
31 36 47
(3 x 441-500 V) [A]
34.1 39.6 51.7
(3 x 441-500 V) [A]
IP21, IP55, IP66 max. cable cross-section5) 16, 10, 16 (6, 8, 6) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-)
(mains, brake, load sharing) [mm2 (AWG)] 2)
IP21, IP55, IP66 max. cable cross-section5) (motor) [mm2 (AWG)] 2) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4)
IP20 max. cable cross-section5) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-)
(mains, brake, motor and load sharing)
Estimated power loss at rated max. load [W] 4) 465 525 739
Weight, enclosure IP20 [lbs/kg] 26.46/12 51.8/23.5 51.8/23.5
Weight, enclosure IP21, IP55, IP66 [lbs/kg] 50.4/23 59.5/27 59.5/27
Efficiency4) 0.98 0.98 0.98

For fuse ratings, see 3.4.1 Fuses
1) Normal overload = 110% torque during 60 s.
2) American Wire Gauge.
3) Measured using 5 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.
4) The typical power loss is at nominal load conditions and expected to be within ±15% (tolerence relates to variety in voltage and
cable conditions).
Values are based on a typical motor efficiency (eff2/eff3 border line). Motors with lower efficiency will also add to the power loss in the
frequency converter and vice versa.
If the switching frequency is increased compared to the default setting, the power losses may rise significantly.
LCP and typical control card power consumptions are included. Further options and customer load may add up to 30 W to the losses.
(Though typical only 4 W extra for a fully loaded control card, or options for slot A or slot B, each).
Although measurements are made with state of the art equipment, some measurement inaccuracy must be allowed for (±5%).
5) The three values for the max. cable cross section are for single core, flexible wire and flexible wire with sleeve, respectively.

P15K P18K P22K

Typical Shaft Output [HP/kW] 25/18.5 30/22 40/30
Enclosure IP21, IP55, IP66 B1 B2 B2
Enclosure IP20 B3 B4 B4
Output current
Continuous
28 36 43
(3 x 525-550 V ) [A]
Intermittent
31 40 47
(3 x 525-550 V ) [A]
Continuous
27 34 41
(3 x 525-600 V ) [A]
Intermittent
30 37 45
(3 x 525-600 V ) [A]
Continuous kVA (550 V AC) [kVA] 26.7 34.3 41.0
Continuous kVA (575 V AC) [kVA] 26.9 33.9 40.8
Max. input current
Continuous
25.4 32.7 39
at 550 V [A]
Intermittent
28 36 43
at 550 V [A]
Continuous
24 31 37
8 8
at 575 V [A]
Intermittent
27 34 41
at 575 V [A]
IP21, IP55, IP66 max. cable cross-section5) (mains, brake, load sharing) 16, 10, 10 (6, 8, 8) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-)
[mm2 (AWG)] 2)
IP21, IP55, IP66 max. cable cross-section5) (motor) [mm2 (AWG)] 2) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4) 35, 25, 25 (2, 4, 4)
IP20 max. cable cross-section5) (mains, brake, motor and load sharing) 10, 10,- (8, 8,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-) 35,-,-(2,-,-)
Estimated power loss 285 329 700
at rated max. load [W] 4)
Weight, enclosure IP21, IP55, IP66 [lbs/kg] 50.4/23 59.5/27 59.5/27
Weight, enclosure IP20 [lbs/kg] 26.46/12 51.8/23.5 51.8/23.5
Efficiency 4) 0.98 0.98 0.98

Mains Supply (L1, L2, L3)

Supply voltage 200-240 V ±10%
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz
Max. imbalance temporary between mains phases 3.0 % of rated supply voltage
True Power Factor (λ) ≥ 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor (cos φ) near unity (> 0.98)
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≤ 7.5 kW Max. 2 times/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ 11 kW Max. 1 time/min.
Environment according to EN60664-1 Overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100.000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240/500/600
V maximum
Motor Compressor Output (U, V, W)

Output voltage 0-100% of supply voltage
Switching on output See 14-01 Switching Frequency
Cable lengths and cross sections
8 8 Max. motor cable length, screened/armored

Max. motor cable length, unscreened/unarmored
150 m
300 m
Max. cross section to motor, mains, load sharing and brake *
Maximum cross section to control terminals, rigid wire 1.5 mm2/16 AWG (2 x 0.75 mm2)
Maximum cross section to control terminals, flexible cable 1 mm2/18 AWG
Maximum cross section to control terminals, cable with enclosed core 0.5 mm2/20 AWG
Minimum cross section to control terminals 0.25 mm2
* See Table 8.1, Table 8.2 and Table 8.3 for more information!
Digital Inputs
Voltage level 0 - 24 V DC
Voltage level, logic.0. PNP <5V DC
Voltage level, logic.1. PNP > 10 V DC
Voltage level, logic .0. NPN2) > 19 V DC
Voltage level, logic .1. NPN2) < 14 V DC
Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ
Safe Stop Terminal 37

Voltage level 0 - 24 V DC
Voltage level, logic.0. PNP < 4 V DC
Voltage level, logic.1. PNP >20 V DC
Nominal input current at 24 V 50 mArms
Nominal input current at 20 V 60 mArms
Input capacitance 400 nF
Terminal 37 is fixed PNP logic
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1. Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.
2. Except safe stop input Terminal 37.
3. Terminal 37 can only be used as safe stop input.

Terminal 37 is suitable for category 3 installations according to EN 954-1 (safe stop according to category 0 EN 60204-1) as
required by the EU Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. Terminal 37 and the Safe Stop function are designed in conformance with
EN 60204-1, EN 50178, EN 61800-2, EN 61800-3, and EN 954-1. For correct and safe use of the Safe Stop function follow the
related information and instructions in the Application Guidelines.
Analog Inputs
Number of analog inputs 2
Terminal number 53, 54
Modes Voltage or current
Mode select Switch S201 and switch S202
Voltage mode Switch S201/switch S202 = OFF (U)
Voltage level -10 to +10 V (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri: approx 10 kΩ
Max. voltage ± 20 V
Current mode Switch S201/switch S202 = ON (I)
Current level 0/4 to 20 mA (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 200 Ω
Max. current 30 mA
Resolution for analog inputs 10 bit (+ sign)
Accuracy of analog inputs
Bandwidth
Max. error 0.5% of full scale
100 Hz
8 8
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Digital Output
Programmable digital/pulse outputs 2
Terminal number 27, 291)
Voltage level at digital/frequency output 0-24 V
Max. output current (sink or source) 40 mA
Max. load at frequency output 1 kΩ
Max. capacitive load at frequency output 10 nF
Minimum output frequency at frequency output 0 Hz
Maximum output frequency at frequency output 32 kHz
Accuracy of frequency output Max. error: 0.1 % of full scale
Resolution of frequency outputs 12 bit
1)Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input. The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage
(PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Analog Output
Number of programmable analog outputs 1
Terminal number 42
Current range at analog output 0/4 to 20 mA
Max. load to common at analog output 500 Ω
Accuracy on analog output Max. error: 0.5 % of full scale
Resolution on analog output 12 bit
The analog output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals
Control Card, 24 V DC Output

Terminal number 12, 13
Max. load 200 mA
The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the analog and
digital inputs and outputs.
Control Card, 10 V DC Output

Terminal number 50
Output voltage 10.5 V ± 0.5 V
Max. load 15 mA
8 8 The 10 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals
Control Card, RS-485 Serial Communication

Terminal number 68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)
Terminal number 61 Common for terminals 68 and 69
The RS-485 serial communication circuit is functionally separated from other central circuits and galvanically isolated from
the supplier voltage (PELV).
Control Card, USB Serial Communication

USB standard 1.1 (Full speed)
USB plug USB type B device plug
Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/device USB cable.
The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals. The USB
ground connection is not galvanically isolated from protection ground. Use only isolated laptop as PC connection to the
USB connector on the frequency converter drive
Relay Outputs
Programmable relay outputs 2
Relay 01 Terminal number 1-3 (break),1-2 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (Resistive load) 60 V DC, 1 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load) 24 V DC, 0.1 A
Relay 02 (CDS 302 only) Terminal number 4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) 400 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 V AC, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) 80 V DC, 2 A

Surroundings
Enclosure ≤ enclosure type A IP20, IP55
Enclosure ≥ enclosure type A, B IP21, IP55
Enclosure kit available ≤ enclosure type A IP21/TYPE 1/IP 4X top
Vibration test 1.0 g
Max. relative humidity 5% - 95% (IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 721-3-3), uncoated class 3C2
Aggressive environment (IEC 721-3-3), coated class 3C3
Test method according to IEC 60068-2-43 H2S (10 days)
Ambient temperature Max. 122 °F/50 °C
Derating for high ambient temperature, see section on special conditions
Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation 32 °F/0 °C
Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance 14 °F/-10 °C
Temperature during storage/transport -13 to 149 °F/-25 to +65/70 °C
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating 3280 ft/1000 m
Maximum altitude above sea level with derating 9842 ft/3000 m
Derating for high altitude, see section on special conditions
EMC standards, Emission EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-3/4, EN 55011, IEC 61800-3
EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-1/2, 8 8
EMC standards, Immunity EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6

8 8

Index Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303
Index
E
ETR......................................................................................................... 5-60
A
Access To Control Terminals........................................................... 2-8
Accessory Bag................................................................... 2-9, 2-10, 3-1 F
FC
Adjustable Warnings, 4-5*............................................................. 5-13
Port Diagnostics, 8-8*................................................................. 5-38
Alarm Messages................................................................................... 6-1 Port Settings, 8-3*........................................................................ 5-36
AMA............................................................................................... 6-8, 6-12 Feedback............................................................................................. 6-11
Ambient Temperature And Altitude............................................ 2-1 Fieldbus & FC Port, 16-8*............................................................... 5-63
Analog Fuses........................................................................................... 6-10, 2-15
Input......................................................................................... 5-26, 6-7
Inputs.................................................................................................. 7-5
Outputs.............................................................................................. 7-6 G
Signal.................................................................................................. 6-7 General
Settings, 8-0*................................................................................. 5-35
Status, 16-0*................................................................................... 5-59
B Graphical Display........................................................................ 4-1, 4-4
Braking................................................................................................. 6-10
Ground Leakage Current....................................................... 1-2, 2-14
Branch Circuit Protection............................................................... 2-15
C I
Input Terminal...................................................................................... 6-7
Cable
Entry.................................................................................................... 2-4 Inputs And Outputs......................................................................... 5-62
Lengths And Cross Sections....................................................... 7-4 Intermediate Circuit........................................................................... 1-2
Catch Up.............................................................................................. 5-18
Communication Option................................................................. 6-10
K
Comparators, 13-1*.......................................................................... 5-42 Keypad.................................................................................................... 1-2
Conductors............................................................................................ 2-7 Knockouts.............................................................................................. 2-4
Configuration..................................................................................... 5-35
Control L
Cables......................................................................... 2-11, 2-12, 2-10 LCP...................... 1-2, 3-1, 4-3, 4-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-56, 5-68, 5-76, 5-79
Card............................................................ 5-55, 6-7, 5-55, 5-56, 7-6
Terminal............................................................................................. 7-4 Leakage Current............................................................... 2-7, 2-14, 1-2
Terminals........................................................................................... 4-3 Local Reference.................................................................................... 5-2
Ctrl. Word Settings, 8-1*................................................................. 5-36 Logic Rules, 13-4*............................................................................. 5-47
Current Rating...................................................................................... 6-8
M
D Mains
Data Readouts, 16-**....................................................................... 5-59 Connection For B1, B2 And B3................................................... 2-1
Connection For B4, C1 And C3................................................... 2-1
DC Link........................................................................................... 1-1, 6-7 Supply................................................. 1-2, 2-10, 4-3, 5-55, 7-1, 7-4
Decoupling Plate...................................................................... 2-7, 2-10 MCT 10.................................................................................................... 4-3
Default Settings............................................ 1-1, 4-3, 5-56, 2-9, 5-81 Mechanical
Diagnosis Read-Outs, 16-9*.......................................................... 5-63 Dimensions....................................................................................... 2-3
Mounting........................................................................................... 2-2
Digital
Input................................................ 5-16, 5-55, 5-72, 5-75, 6-8, 7-6
Inputs...................................................................... 4-3, 5-9, 5-20, 7-4
Output................................................................................... 5-16, 5-55
Outputs............................................................................................ 5-20
Digital/Bus, 8-5*................................................................................ 5-37

Motor
Compressor Cable.......................................................................... 2-7
Compressor Connection.............................................................. 2-6
V
Connection....................................................................................... 1-2 Voltage
Current.................................................... 5-20, 5-78, 5-79, 6-12, 5-5 Imbalance.......................................................................................... 6-7
Data.......................................................................................... 6-8, 6-12 Level................................................................................... 1-2, 7-4, 7-5
Limits, 4-1*...................................................................................... 5-13
Overload Protection...................................................................... 1-1
Power............................................................................................... 6-12 W
Status................................................................................................ 5-59 Warnings................................................................................................ 6-1
O
Operating Mode.................................................................................. 5-2
Output Current.................................................................................... 6-8
P
Phase Loss.............................................................................................. 6-7
Programming....................................................................................... 6-7
R
Ramp Up Time................................................................................... 5-10
Relay Outputs............................................................................ 5-20, 7-6
Reset............................................................................................. 6-8, 6-13
RS Flip Flops, 13-1*........................................................................... 5-45
S
Safe
Stop.................................................................................. 3-1, 2-10, 7-4
Torque Off......................................................................................... 1-2
Safety Instructions.............................................................................. 1-1
Screened/armored.......................................................... 2-7, 2-12, 7-4
Sequence Of Operation.................................................................... 0-2
Shielded/armoured............................................................... 2-10, 2-11
Short
Circuit.................................................................................................. 6-9
Circuit Protection......................................................................... 2-15
Speed Bypass, 4-6*........................................................................... 5-14
States, 13-5*........................................................................................ 5-52
Stripping................................................................................................. 2-9
Supply Voltage.................................................................................. 6-10
Surroundings........................................................................................ 7-7
T
Terminal 54......................................................................................... 6-13
Thermal Load..................................................................................... 5-60
Timers, 13-2*...................................................................................... 5-47


MG34M422

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MG34M422

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MG34M422

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Operating Instructions VLT® CDS 302 and CDS 303

2 Safety Instructions and General Warnings 2-1

3 How to Install 3-1

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

3.3.10 Basic Wiring Example 3-9

4 Quick Set-up 4-1

5 How to Program 5-1

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

5.2.10 Changing a Text Value 5-5

6 Parameter Descriptions 6-1

8 General Specifications 8-1

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

Reference High pressure cutout

Low Pressure Cutout

Pressure sensor 4-20 mA

Figure 1.1 Compressor Drive System

• A “plug & play” solution

• Flexibility & best control accuracy

• Innovative and reliable solution

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor 1-1

• Oil Injection If a rotor is blocked, the Compressor Drive trips with an

• Oil Management The manufacturer sets up the necessary start settings,

• Discharge Temperature Limit

• Low Pressure Switch

1-2 MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

2 Safety Instructions and General Warnings

WARNING the output frequency of the frequency converter is limited

CDS 302 Operating Instructions Software version: 2.4x

2.1.5 Safety Instructions

• Make sure that the frequency converter is

• Do not remove mains plugs or motor plugs while

• Protect personnel against supply voltage

• Protect the motor against overloading according

• Motor overload protection is included in the

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor 2-1

WARNING • bus commands

Do not connect 400 V frequency converters with RFI-filters and 1.

2-2 MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

WARNING Abbrev. Ref.

• DC (Diagnostic Coverage): 99% part of safe failures and dangerous

• HFT (Hardware Fault Tolerance)=0 (1001

Data for EN IEC 61508 low demand

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor 2-3

• service technician • It is not recommended to stop the frequency

2-4 MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

Example with STO

Example with SS1

according to IEC 60204-1 (see Figure 2.5). When activating

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor 2-5

the resulting probability still meets the requirements for

Figure 2.6 STO Category 4 Example

Table 2.4 Legend to Figure 2.5

2-6 MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor

1 1. Activate the Safe Torque Off function by

WARNING Restart behaviour. Set the value of 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe

MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor 2-7

2 2 WARNING state, and the mechanical brake (if connected)

• the mechanical brake is activated (if

2-8 MG34M422 - VLT® is a registered Danfoss trademark/Commercial Compressor